Home

maxpro® vms r300 sp1 - Honeywell Integrated Security

1. 18 USEFUL DIPSS Loi och art tn asd anh cade RM a ded RS OU AUI 19 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS es 20 CONFIGURING THE MONITOR DISPLAY PROPERTIES 25 ABOUT SERIAL EXPANDER sss hr rae 25 ENABLING WINDOWS 3 5 27 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE 37 OVERVIEW E dubie ER LE baba cae DRIN E 37 BEFORE YOU BEGIN 2 eee es 37 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS y ce eee har eens 37 OPERATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE RECORDERS 37 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS SOFTWARE 39 How TO INSTALL MAXPRO VMS 39 COMPLETE INSTALLATION 1 0 0 0 raa ccc ccc ccc cece e ene 45 BEFORE YOU BEGIN 2 0 0 ss 45 CUSTOM INSTALLATION 00 cc ccc eee a rs 49 SERVER INSTALLATION cc eh 49 CLIENT INSTALLATION 24 422 sho RAD dbs he AS aA GG OS YES ODA aA oe 55 VIDEO ANALYTICS SERVER INSTALLATION 61 BEFORE YOU BEGIN eu 5 573 ded det A Ru Ade ulna ad 61 AFTER INSTALLING MAXPRO VMS R310 ueeeeeeee e 64 MAXPRO VMS R310 Table of Contents REMOVING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE 65 BEFORE YOU BEGIN 0 0 ee hh hn hh hh hr 65 AFTER REMOVING MAXPRO VMS R
2. gt Recorders x Recorders v 059944222 bu MAXPRO NR 015935918725 v uid 35 Bua 45 Build 6S Rev Local Corera uei Sytem Voces Enters 12 sever Recorder tipses 17 Rapdtye 12 User Detined Everts Ever E 16 Migratior Export E IP Camera Management Giur sees Scheduling 71 NN es Abr JEN _ wit Sere Seite Count 0 oo NEL m Alarm s 10879 44157 AM Figure 4 12 Recorder grouping Example 2 If you want to group the columns by Name then right click on the Name column and then choose Group by Name option as shown below The column arrangement is displayed a shown below MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 111 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE fim Mideotnouts w Recorder x Addi Update Delete Recordes omen 5 Click under each node to expand and view the details Similarly repeat the step 4 to add more column headers To remove the column headers from the Grouped By area Drag the required columns from the Grouped By area and drop into the actual header area To filter the recorder columns by defining the value 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Devices in the navigation area 3 Click the Recorders branch The Re
3. RC ee ed eee dawn 246 MAXPRO VMS R310 Table of Contents EVENT GROUP dod hae binds dw eae bh Rowe EP S ee eh POSU PPP herd 247 ADDING AN EVENT GROUP 0 cc ne haha hh 247 DELETING AN EVENT GROUP ss ick soca eh ake DR haa ee Ee ea dh RC DA ke ee 247 INTERCEPT KEYS A copo her Sod f Dura vnda dedos 249 ADDING INTERCEPT KEY lees hh hh hh 249 UPDATING INTERCEPT KEYS suua eR RR UR etr UC Woes oe nd eee 250 DELETING INTERCEPT 250 LOGICAL CAMERA ios dire Scd aot V Oed Rd ot RA i e 252 ADDING A LOGICAL CAMERA veered et eke ga ede aa a 252 DELETING A LOGICAL CAMERA llle aa 255 UPDATING LOGICAL CAMERAS crs ccie hh hahaha 255 SYSTEM MACROS 5212 oe beh ex x dot ER bal px E HORE raza abad dn 256 ADDING A SYSTEM MACRO lesse hehe 256 EXECUTING A SYSTEM 2 52 critt eh hh hh 256 DELETING A SYSTEM MACRO o errie d cece ehh has 257 RECORDER GROUPS ier FR EP Ye 258 ASSOCIATING RECORDER TO RECORDER GROUPS 258 DISASSOCIATING RECORDERS FROM THE RECORDER 260 UPDATING RECORDER GROUP 0 00 ene nen tenet nen eee 260 DELETING RECORDER 2 9 49 ehh hahaha 261 TRIN
4. Settings Data Be saven Y Pa Rep Di 02 w dpa D b Party Even 9 w E LJ D 6 5 b Restore Notes field Change Requires Alans 12957 7415 Figure 4 67 Joystick 4 Specify the Basic Settings The following table lists the basic settings Field Description COM Port Number The reference number of the serial port There can be up to 20 ports defined in a single system Port Name The port name that you want to assign Ensure that the port name does not exceed 18 characters MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Serial Port Field Description Port Type The type of the serial port You can select the port type from the drop down list The ports types are e Joystick Controller e VB PIT e Auxiliary Max Pro e Error log The error logged in the error log file is sent through the serial port Only one port can be selected for errorlog data Analog Mimic Panel Serial Network Serial Printer The system hard copy print output is redirected to the serial port if this option is selected Only one port can be selected as a printer port e MaxPro Switcher e O Control VideoBlox e Auxiliary Control VideoBlox e Pre Tilter Test Not recommended MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 269 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE
5. Figure 4 34 Switcher Events 2 Click Associate The Select Available Events dialog box appears 3 Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to associate 4 Click OK To disassociate events from a switcher e Select the check box corresponding to the event and then click Remove To add event groups to events 1 Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to add the Event Group 2 Double click on the Event Group box Select Event Groups dialog box appears 3 Click the check box corresponding to the Event Group you want to add 4 Click OK Note You need to add an event group before you associates it to an event See Adding an Event Group for more information To disable an event 1 Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to disable 2 Click the cell under the Disabled column A drop down list is enabled 3 Select True to disable the event To assign severity level 1 Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to assign the severity level 2 Click the cell under the Severity Level column and edit the severity level 186 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP SITE Switchers Note Severity level is set to trigger alarms when the threshold is met For example if the threshold is set 50 in the preferences tab an alarm is triggered when threshold becomes 51 To enter remarks 1 Select the check
6. Server Gos emm CHOP Banal petis oron peor rover Decr Event o Migration Dio bree tena 10114 ous Der Dec 001310852E eA anco fees cent sca E Please select camera type to uporade Uvex 13 7 Ale ret lupo a f f Gone 1 schede coo xb oA py e reont EGU vd be med v belar La Airy rsen Total Record Court 49 Figure 4 73 Upgrade Options 4 From the Please select camera type to upgrade drop down list select the required Equip series camera The available cameras for the Equip series are displayed 5 Select the check box corresponding to the cameras that you want to upgrade firmware 6 Inthe Select firmware upgrade file box click the ellipses button and then select the firmware upgrade file 7 Click Start A confirmation message appears 8 Click OK AssiGNING IP ADDRESS To assign IP address 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand IP Camera Management in the navigation area and then click Equip Series The Equip Series screen appears in the display area 3 Select the check box corresponding to the cameras for which you want to assign IP address 4 Click IP Assign The IP assign options appear in the lower pane In the Enter Starting IP Address box type the starting IP address for the ca
7. 3 ff ser Management Sop 4 Sand malabis E vor Sen 5 Sedul wisi coria pap Sap Sainct aladin devom a irate event ECEN nee recorder nane Comers sided Contact Gow Me Comers Lino wes Ades Comers Servat Heth Charges 7 Groups Daso ws 2s Central seever Cescrnencted G Poele Conerdfirget Heath Charged Comerelinet State Changed Stes Heath Changed Evert Controuput State Ono Wkereest ters Database Server Accepts Connecte Aegea Comme Database Server Faker Spm Maio Server Heath Changed sj d Recorder rin Expand All T xp Ses Pants ee Uses Defined Even werk Aix o Migration ett Gap Poort NAOPRO VMS Server Conrected MACRO WO S HS 3 Conte fase E IP Camera Manoyronent M OPRO VMS Server Decine MAXPRO Wa 3 MARO 3 Contact Grow 1 EQUIP Seres margo Nie serere Corrected MAGRO NR 9 MAXPRO NR F Contant exp Fase Schedchng D Server Dectnre NRI Goo t p Corvin Exterprke 233 Contact F e Recorder 233 Contact Alaris 11770 6 55PM Figure 4 80 Events Configured for notification Removing events from alarm notification 1 In the Events Configured for notification section select the required events
8. 11 In the Text Display Settings area select the check boxes to select the text display settings The following table lists the options Option Description Enhanced Card To enhance the appearance of the text display Hidden Text To hide the text display on the monitor Shadow To apply shadow affect for the text display BackGround To apply background affect for the text display Reverse To reverse black white affect for the text display Black White Double Height To increase the height of text display on monitor Flash To display blinking text on the monitor Note Selecting the Select All check box enables all the Text Display Settings 12 13 14 In the X and Y boxes type a location for the text to appear on the monitor Valid positions are 1 13 X and Y coordinates represent the horizontal and vertical position respectively In the Device Macro Flags area select the required Flag check boxes to set the macro flag to True This field allows for definition of the default cold boot state of the macro flags for the current video input device Click Select All to set all the macro flags to True Click Save ADDING A VIDEO OuTPUT DEVICE TRUNK 1 2 3 In the VideoOutput Name box type the name for the monitor In the Description box type a description for the monitor In the Callup Number box an automatic number is allocated by default The operator uses this number to
9. Event Name Event Attributes Attribute Description Analytics server CPU is CPU usage in CPU usage in percentage overloaded percentage Low disk space in analytics Free disk space in Available free disk space in server MB MB Analytics server disk Free disk space in Available free disk space in reaching minimum disk MB MB space Analytics server disk is Free disk space in Available free disk space in healthy MB MB 240 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Analytics 241 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP SITE E PARTITIONS A partition is a logical grouping of recorders video inputs switchers and video outputs across various sites Partitions are created for granting specific access rights to the users of MAXPRO VMS You can add a new partition by specifying a unique ID and a description After adding a partition you can add video devices to it You can also delete a partition when it is no longer needed Before deleting a partition disassociate the video devices from it and also unassign it from the user DEFAULT PARTITION A default partition is automatically created in MAXPRO VMS and all the newly added video devices are associated to it Since all the new devices are a part of the default partition all users logging on to MAXPRO VMS can view them PARTITIONS AND USERS
10. Recorders Recorder MAXPRO NVR Event Name Recording Server Connected Event Attributes Attribute Description Recording Server Disconnected Low Disk Space Recording Server Connected Recording Server Disconnected MAXPRO NVR Controller Connected MAXPRO NVR Controller Disconnected Recording Settings Retrieved HRDP Recorder Connected Recorder Disconnected Output Enabled Output Disabled Milestone Recorder Connected Recorder Disconnected Central Server Connected Central Server Disconnected Digital Sentry Recorder Connected Recorder Disconnected Output Enabled Output Disabled Intellex Recorder Connected MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 107 108 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders Recorder Event Name Event Attribute Description Attributes RapidEye Recorder Connected Recorder Disconnected Sessions Rejected System Self Restart System Reboot System No Video Recording System Storage Device Missing System Time Server Unusable System No Synchronization in 24 Hours System S M A R T Disk Failure Rule Engine Action Triggered System Excessive System Clock Drift Maintenance Configuration Modification Maintenance Security Modif
11. erbe eure ues Mae Rw BG Ses Se V WORT PROP RUE 324 UPGRADING MAXPRO VMS R240 TO MAXPRO VMS R300 330 ABOUT THIS GUIDE INTRODUCING MAXPRO VMS R310 MAXPRO Video Management System R310 MAXPRO VMS R310 is an enterprise class video management and hybrid solution It enables you to perform various surveillance operations on traditional analog network and IP based video equipment in the same surveillance network You can deploy thousands of cameras in number of locations and add many video devices such as recorders and monitors SCOPE Ce ees This guide helps you in e Setting up the hardware for the MAXPRO VMS system e Installing and uninstalling the MAXPRO VMS software e Commissioning the MAXPRO VMS system e Verifying the MAXPRO VMS system after the commissioning process Upgrading from previous versions of MAXPRO VMS to MAXPRO VMS R310 INTENDED AUDIENCE This guide is intended for the field and commissioning engineers of MAXPRO VMS system MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 11 ABOUT THIS GUIDE Structure of this Guide STRUCTURE OF THIS GUIDE The following table describes the contents of each chapter in this guide No Chapter Description 1 Commissioning Plan Description of the process involved in commissioning the MAXPRO VMS 2 Setting up the Client and the Hardware specifications for MAXPRO Server Computers VMS server and client co
12. Alternate View When Alternate Camera 4 is selected it can automatically move to the designated VIEW preset position The valid camera views range is 1 99 0 is the default value which indicates no camera view is to be selected Note As the view number 0 is used for indicating that NO VIEW is specified view 0 cannot be recalled by this field Note Pressing the ALT key continuously on the keyboard cycles around the Primary camera and Alternate cameras defined in the group Using the upper arrow and lower arrow keys selects the next or previous camera in the group until the last defined camera has been selected Then an End of Sequence message is displayed on the user s monitor 8 Associate Joystick Controller See Associating Joystick Controllers to Logical Camera for more information 9 Click Save ASSOCIATING J OYSTICK CONTROLLERS TO LOGICAL CAMERA To associate joystick controller to logical camera 1 2 3 4 Click the Joystick Controller tab The Joystick Controller screen appears Click Associate The Select Joystick Controllers dialog box appears Select the check box corresponding to the joystick name you want to associate Click OK Note By default 99 joystick controllers are available in MAXPRO VMS To disassociate joystick controller from logical camera Select the check box corresponding to the joystick name and then click Remove MAXPRO VMS R310 Commiss
13. Before you begin e Adda Workstation Adding a Workstation for more information To associate a user to workstation 1 Click the User Workstations tab The screen displays the associated workstations if any MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 217 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Users lt WITS si Figure 4 47 User Workstations 2 Click Associate The Select User Workstation dialog box appears 3 Select the check box corresponding to the workstation name you want to associate 4 Click OK To disassociate workstation from a user e Select the check box corresponding to the workstation name and then click Remove ASSOCIATING J OYSTICK CONTROLLER TO USERS You can associate users to joystick controllers to perform video surveillance tasks in MAXPRO VMS Before you begin e Add a joystick controller To associate the joystick controller to a user 1 Click the Joystick Controller tab The screen displays the associated joysticks if any 218 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Users Lm Due _ Operatori x eee WIN NTOHDU Wider em WINTON winara WIENTOSHEU WINHTOIMU WINTON WIN NTOSMBU WIN OTERARL WIN ATOSHMBU Figure 4 48 User Joystick Controller 2 Click Associate The Select Joystick Contr
14. Figure 4 22 Video Inputs Filtering 4 Drag and drop the required columns in upper header area to view the corresponding column details Or Right click on the required column name and then choose Group by or Ungroup by option Example 1 If you want to view the details of only VideoInputName Type and Address at once drag and drop the columns one after another to the upper header area as shown below Viewer Seat Report Rocorders c RI ge Mdeolnputs gt Devices Lus phe Drinte Vect Recorders Video Cutpahs Cuolrolers iiaa Y MIC NU TV PemaryMader SectndaryMaster Address Ste T Anha Bones 19001 Meo reis Farad Carnes Criat Gop ud Patet 2 Rolex Digtal Fixed Caren 5 G Groups S By Sequences Partitions Y wees Werbstations Ses MB Everk Groups ACM3S11 320 Trircegl ley T Comers bil Siem Moros 41234 Server Recorder Group 779 Ms Send ats 09 2 Association anoi fii Uses Defined Evon T Everk Ascot E Migration AnsogPTz O3 453 Tert Expert acs E y IP Camera Management v PUDINS 8 raum senes v BAMOSAIP Cuni Figure 4 23 Video Inputs Grouping 156 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs Example 2 I
15. Monitor Double double height text displayed on monitors VCR Other Normal normal height text displayed on VCRs and other video output devices e VCR Other Double double height test displayed on VCRs and other video output devices e Pretext Normal normal height text inserted by pretext subracks e Pretext Double double height text inserted by pretext subracks Information Lines The columns on the table represent the types of information that are displayed as text Not all information line types are available for every text type and height Real Time Clock Line defines the line where the Real Time Clock is displayed Video Source Description defines the line where the video input device description is displayed e Monitor Keyboard Description defines the line where the monitor description is displayed When an operator selects the monitor this text is replaced with Keyboard description or the User description e Mode Line defines the line where the mode text for example scan mode is displayed Message Line defines the line where the message line text for example warning message is displayed e Other Settings Settings Instructions Description Auto Message Timeout in Type a value to define the time period for the seconds automatic display of automatic message line text Valid values are 2 9 9 seconds MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning a
16. Note For more information on how to save and view images refer to the MAXPRO VMS R310 Help MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 315 VERIFYING THE CONFIGURATION OF MAXPRO VMS Checking the Sending and Receiving of Operator Messages CHECKING THE SENDING AND RECEIVING OF OPERATOR MESSAGES Operator messaging enables operators to send video displayed in one or more panels or the whole salvo layout to other operators and digital monitors Comments can be included in the message sent to operators The comments are not included when the message is send to digital monitors The received messages can be viewed in the Messages window The number of new messages appears in the blinking mode in the status bar For example Messages 3 in green color indicates three new messages The following figure illustrates the Messages window rri Figure 5 8 Messages window Note For more information on how to send and receive messages refer to the MAXPRO VMS R310 Help 316 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide VERIFYING THE CONFIGURATION OF MAXPRO VMS Checking the Surrounding Cameras Feature CHECKING THE SURROUNDING CAMERAS FEATURE A camera can be associated to a group of cameras using the surrounding cameras feature This feature enables operators to view video from a group of related cameras at the same time For example video from cameras located in t
17. des d Sb dep DP edad he ae 233 UPDATING A SEQUENCE 0 cc rs 235 DELETING A SEQUENCE RR O4 DO CA Ro Badd BL dale aed 235 ANALYTICS ge nee hoe 236 HONEYWELL VIDEO ANALYTICS ACTIVEYE REPORTING TOOL 236 HONEYWELL VIDEO ANALYTICS ACTIVEYE ALARM MANAGEMENT 236 HONEYWELL VIDEO ANALYTICS ACTIVEYE CONFIGURATION TOOL 236 HONEYWELL VIDEO ANALYTICS ACTIVEYE FORENSICS 237 HONEYWELL VIDEO ANALYTICS ACTIVEYE LIVE MONITORING STATION 237 HONEYWELL VIDEO ANALYTICS ACTIVEYE USER CONFIGURATION 237 ADDING AN ANALYTICS SERVER ee ten ene 237 PARTITIONS nerden eae 242 ADDING A PARTITION oo eee Pod xe Sh ee ee SR qd ek edu 242 DELETING A PARTITION soc da as dda dex Ge ee GE RE ER x NR ade 243 WORKSTATIONS se inta PHONES dead cae tad Ghee ade ae 244 ADDING A WORKSTATION 00 cece ee haha 244 DELETING A WORKSTATION sees has 244 BITE bind Fouad 246 ADDING A SITE ox dua cin dvd Gash eda a Ge add ds 246 DELETING A SITE eed
18. An event group is a grouping of events that occur on devices The events in each event group are defined when you add a device such as recorder switcher and camera A default event group is added when you install MAXPRO VMS You can use the default event group or create new event groups See Event Group for more information 82 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP SITE Setting up a site using Configurator ADDING RECORDER GROUPS Recorder group feature distributes the load on a controller It allows you to create different groups and associate recorders to it Associating recorders to the groups enables the load is distributed among the recorder controllers See Recorder Groups for more information ADDING SERIAL PORTS Serial ports are added for communication with joystick controllers Ultrakey keyboards switchers and Protocol Interface Translators PIT You can add up to 20 serial ports to MAXPRO VMS server See Serial Port for more information ADDING ANALYTICS You can add analytics server for automating motion detection triggering real time alarms and enabling fast search and retrieval of videos The applications can be launched directly from the server or from a separate client personal computer PC that can access the server through a TCP connection See Analytics for more information ADDING RECORDERS You can add Rapid Eye MAXPRO NVR Enterprise IP Engine HRXD
19. Associate Event Groups See Associating Video Outputs to Event Groups for more information Click Save ADDING MONITORS DiGITAL MONITOR To add a digital monitor 1 2 3 4 Select the Digital Monitor under Select Monitor Type In the VideoOutput Name box type the name for the monitor In the Description box type a description for the monitor In the Callup Number box an automatic number is allocated by default The operator uses this number to select a monitor from the keyboard In the Site box select the location in which the monitor is used In the Default Salvo View drop down list select the default salvo view for the monitor Note This feature helps in configuring the wall mounted digital monitors in a site to display live video from the selected salvo views 10 Select the Launch in Full Screen check box to launch the selected default salvo view in full screen mode whenever the monitor is turned on In the Select Workstation drop down list in Device Settings area select the workstation to which the monitor is connected In the Workstation Monitor Number box type the number configured for the monitor during workstation setup Click Save MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Outputs ANALOG MONITOR To add a analog monitor 1 2 3 4 v Select the Analog Monitor under Select Monitor Type In the Video
20. DHCP p Deo pe Decr orsono DWP Dec 00OAL310852 ik Acca tne Decr Decr Decr De DGIFSEDECER 4 78 17990 Figure 4 72 Equip Series Cameras VERSION To check the version 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand IP Camera Management in the navigation area and then click Equip Series The Equip Series screen appears in the display area 3 Select the check box corresponding to the cameras for which you want to check version 4 Click Version FIRMWARE UPGRADE To upgrade the firmware 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand IP Camera Management in the navigation area and then click Equip Series The Equip Series screen appears in the display area 3 Click Upgrade The upgrade options appear in the lower pane MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Equip Series Camera 9 troup Senes x Assign IP Adressf upqrade femvware for COUIP Series Camera s Note Use Version option to get finmavere version Device thane ee versn BI ACSIMDIFE Decr TIE CDS Anil DHCP Dcp DHCP 51 once t sepes Dec Dec Decr 12 Dec Wine BEHAMO BIOMO D ec BL HOSMOLIP Caen I ky
21. In the Port Type drop down list select the port type as NONE In the Baud Rate drop down list select 9600 In the Data Bit drop down list select EIGHT In the Stop Bit drop down list select ONE In the Parity drop down list select NONE Pelco In the COM Port Number type the reference number of the serial port In the Port Name type a name for the port In the Port Type drop down list select the port type as NONE In the Baud Rate drop down list select 9600 In the Data Bit drop down list select EIGHT In the Stop Bit drop down list select ONE In the Parity drop down list select an odd parity MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 181 182 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Switchers Switchers Instructions MaxPro Inthe COM Port Number type the reference number of the serial port e Inthe Port Name type a name for the port e Inthe Port Type drop down list select the port type as NONE In the Baud Rate drop down list select 19200 e In the Data Bit drop down list select SEVEN Inthe Stop Bit drop down list select ONE Inthe Parity drop down list select an even parity American Inthe COM Port Number type the reference number of the Dynamics serial port Inthe Port Name type a name for the port nthe Port Type drop down list select the port type as NONE In the Baud Rate drop down list select 19200 In the Data Bit drop down list se
22. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide To create a schedule 4 5 6 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs Click the Configurator tab Expand Devices in the navigation area and then click Video Inputs The Video Inputs screen appears in the display area Double click the camera or select the camera and then click Update The general settings for the camera appear Click the Advance Settings tab Click the Schedules tab and then click Create a new schedule Configure the Schedule Details according to your requirement The following table lists the settings for configuring a schedule 7 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide Type Settings Type The type of schedule e Recording records video as specified in the schedule Video Analytics controls when video analytics is enabled for the camera Start The date and time at which the schedule starts and stops To End specify the time click each unit hour and minute and type the appropriate value Note Description or comments about the schedule Frame rate Only applies to Recording schedules The frame rate at which the video is recorded Archive after Only applies to Recording schedules The period for which scheduled recordings are available for playback before they are automatically archived If set this must be less than the Delete after period Delete after Onl
23. EnduraExpress ivi Analytics Server amp Client Analytics Client Analytics Driver Next gt Cancel Figure 3 31 Select Features MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 61 62 INSTALLING THE VMS R310 SOFTWARE Video Analytics Server Installation 3 Select Analytics Engine and then click Next The MAXPRO VMS Client configuration dialog box appears Clear the check boxes corresponding to the device drivers which you do not wish to install MAXPRO YMS R310 Enterprise Edition MAXPRO MS R310 Client configuration 5 Server Installshield Figure 3 32 MAXPRO VMS Client Configuration 4 Inthe MaxproVMS Server box type the name of the MAXPRO VMS Server and then click Next The Database Server Login dialog box appears MAXPRO MS R310 Enterprise Edition Database Server Login ver and authentication method Select the database servers Y credentials or a SQL Databas local SQLEXPRESS Connect using Qi Windo thentication Server authentication using Login ID and password below Login ID Password InstallShield Figure 3 33 Database Server Login 5 Click Browse and then select any existing SQL database You can select the existing SQL database on the same network If you do not want to select an existing database proceed to step step 7 6 Select Connect using option as Windows authentication or SQL Server authentication using Login ID
24. Record frame rate The frame rate at which video is recorded MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs Settings Description Archive each clip The period for which background recordings are available for after playback before they are automatically archived If set this must be less than the Delete each clip after period otherwise the clips are deleted before they can be archived The duration commences at the clip s end date and time Delete each clip The duration for which background recordings are stored after before being automatically deleted The duration commences at the clip s end date and time Configure the settings in the Macro Triggered Recording area The following table lists the settings in Macro Triggered Recording area Settings Pre record for Description The duration of video that the IP engine keeps in memory for event activated recordings When event is activated and a recording is started the IP engine inserts this pre record segment at the start of the recording Configuring a prerecord period on the recording allows you to view what was happening before the event was activated For example if you set this to 10 seconds the recording shows the 10 seconds of video before the recording was activated Record frame rate The frame rate at which video is recorded Archive event after The
25. To restore default intercept keys Click Restore ASSOCIATING J OYSTICK CONTROLLERS TO INTERCEPT KEYS To associate joystick controller to intercept keys 1 Click the Joystick Controller tab The Joystick Controller screen appears 2 Click Associate The Select Joystick Controllers dialog box appears 3 Select the check box corresponding to the joystick name you want to associate 4 Click OK Note By default 99 joystick controllers are available in MAXPRO VMS To disassociate joystick controller from intercept keys e Select the check box corresponding to the joystick name and then click Remove UPDATING INTERCEPT KEYS You can update intercept keys to change the key press number and change the description To update intercept keys 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Groups in the navigation area and then click Intercept Keys The Intercept Keys screen appears in the display area 3 Select the check box corresponding to the intercept key you want to update 4 Click Update The general settings for the intercept key appear You can modify the settings according to your needs DELETING INTERCEPT KEYS To delete intercept keys 1 Click the Configurator tab 250 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Intercept Keys 2 Expand Groups in the navigation area and then click Intercept Keys The Intercept Keys screen appears in the display area Sele
26. condition Language From the drop down list select the required language e Network Settings Settings Instructions Description Video Level Fail in seconds Type a value to set the detection period time that elapses before a video level failure is reported Valid values are 0 immediate to 30 seconds Note A video sync loss is detected immediately and is not effected by the value in the video level fail field Network Node ID Type a unique network node ID Valid network node numbers are 1 99 For a single system this value should be zero 0 Note The Network node ID is not live updated to the server Ethernet Port Number Type the port number that are used by the clients to connect to the server over the Ethernet The default port number is 26026 The Ethernet Port Number is not live updated to the server IP Address Type the IP Address of the server of the Server to which the controller needs to be connected MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 263 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING Macro Settings UP A SITE Settings Cold Boot Macro Instructions Description Type the desired macro When the MAXPRO VMS Server is powered up or reset the Cold Boot macro sequence is executed following all the normal system and equipment initialization Note Cold Boot can be initiated from MAXPRO VMS Cold Boot button in the Trinity Controller page War
27. jase residing in Analytics Ves No Install Figure 3 45 Restoring Analytics Database Click the required option to retain the Analytics database residing in Analytics Engine and then Click Next The Start Copying Files dialog box similar to the following figure appears MAXPRO MS R310 Enterprise Edition Start Copying Files Rey ettings before copying files has enough infor 195 cli Cui gs Destination path C Program Files x86 Domain name win2k8 64bit1 Domain user name admin Features selected HRXD HRDP Analytics Server amp Client Analytics Driver Installed Figure 3 46 Start Copying Files MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 69 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE DTE Removing the MAXPRO VMS R310 Software 6 Click Next A confirmation message appears as shown below Question EB ia e Do you want to completely remove the selected Feature s 7 Click Yes to proceed The selected components of the MAXPRO VMS R310 are removed and the Uninstall Complete dialog box appears MAXPRO YMS R310 Enterprise Edition Maintenance Complete Mizard has finished performing maintenance operations on Installshield Figure 3 47 Uninstall Complete 8 Click Finish You are prompted to reboot the computer MAXPRO MS R300 System requires a reboot Please save all the unsaved data before rebooting the system ey Figure 3 48 Pro
28. 5 Select the Advanced Settings check box to specify the advance settings The following table lists the advanced settings Field Description ID 1 to ID 8 These fields are used for limiting the amount of data that is transmitted from a selected port Placing a number in any of these fields only transmits data to the equipment of selected type with that ID number The ID1 field allows the value ALL to be entered which enables all data of the selected type to be transmitted regardless of the ID number Selecting ALL clears all the other ID fields The valid ID range for the selected port types are e Keyboard ID 1 99 e Subrack ID 1 799 e Network ID 1 255 e Highlevel Mimic ID 1 99 Enter the value in each ID field and press ENTER Note This is not applicable for VideoBlox For VideoBlox subrack ID3 ID4 these two fields represent the video loss source device type e amp 0 represents video loss source device is Input cards e 0 amp represents video loss source device is Concentrator e 1 amp Orepresents video loss source device is or pretext devices e j amp lrepresents no device as video loss source device For VideoBlox subrack ID6 this ID represents the version of matrix switcher hardware for audio switching 1 represents the old VideoBlox matrix switcher hardware For VideoBlox subrack ID7 this ID represents the version of matrix switcher hardware for video switching 1
29. 64 Bit Version on 64 Bit Server and Windows server 2012 OS for MAXPRO VMS Server Antivirus McAfee VirusScan 8 8 or Symantic Antivirus V10 Monitor Resolution 1024x768 pixels 65K colors non interlaced drivers for the recorders please refer to the Operating Systems sheet in the MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 37 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE OD MAXPROVMS HW SW Compatibility Matrix xls file available on the MAXPRO VMS R310 DVD 38 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Installing the MAXPRO VMS Software INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS SOFTWARE To complete MAXPRO VMS installation follow the procedures in these sections 1 First How to Install MAXPRO VMS 2 Choose the installation that best suits your requirements and follow the appropriate steps e Complete Installation e Custom Installation How TO INSTALL MAXPRO VMS Note The installing user should be administrator or domain work group administrator To install MAXPRO VMS 1 Insert the MAXPRO VMS R310 DVD in the DVD drive The setup runs automatically If the setup does not run automatically browse to the setup folder on the DVD and double click Setup exe MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 39 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE 3 A confirmation message is displayed to disable the Aut
30. Explorer version 7 0 or later 324 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide UPGRADING TO VMS R310 Upgrading MAXPRO VMS R300 to MAXPRO VMS R310 To upgrade to MAXPRO VMS R310 1 Insert the MAXPRO VMS R310 DVD in the DVD drive The setup runs automatically If the setup does not run automatically browse to the setup folder on the DVD and double click Setup exe Note confirmation message is displayed to disable the Automatic Windows updates as shown below Click Yes to disable and proceed The Welcome dialog box appears install MAXPRO VMS R310 you have to disable automatic dE Automatic Windows update has been enabled your system To updates Click Y es to disable automatic updates and proceed with MAXPRO MS R310 Enterprise Edition Welcome to MAXPRO VMS R310 Enterprise Edition Upgradation grade the current installed version of ext Installshield Figure 6 1 Welcome MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 325 UPGRADING TO VMS R310 Upgrading MAXPRO VMS R300 to MAXPRO VMS R310 2 Click Next The Validation of User Credentials dialog box appears MAXPRO MS R310 Enterprise Edition alidation of User Credentials Domain Name Host Name WIN2K8 64BIT2 User Name restart Figure 6 2 Validation of User Credentials 3 Inthe Domain Name Host Name list type the domain name or host name if you k
31. Frequency Instructions You can choose from a set of frequencies that are available The available frequencies are Now to run a job at that point of time Once to run a job once Hourly to run a job every hour Daily to run a job daily Weekly to run a job weekly Select a day on which you want the job to run Monthly to run a job monthly In the Every ofevery Month s type the day on which the job has to be performed every month Yearly to run a job yearly 9 Click Save MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 287 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE ALARM NOTIFICATION 0606060950000906000000050000050005 000000000065000000000000 0000902090009009099 The alarms that are triggered can be notified to users You can select a device its events and associate it to a contact group The users belonging to the contact group receive a notification whenever a selected event occurs and an alarm is triggered To configure an alarm notification 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Scheduling in the navigation area and then click Alarm Notification The Alarm Notification screen appears aP Alarm Notification x arm nckficaticn Detake zl 1 z a i rede nam i Seit Expand All Collapse All 13058 Figure 4 79 Alarm Notification From the Step 1 Select Site drop down list s
32. Fusion Milestone DigitalSentry MAXPRO VMS and HRDP recorders After adding recorders you can associate them with partitions and define the events Only users of the partition that is associated with the recorder can configure the recorder settings Only the events defined for the recorder can be configured to trigger event based alarms For example if you associate Recorder Disconnected event to a recorder you can configure an alarm to be triggered when this event occurs See Recorders for more information ADDING SWITCHERS Presently you can add Vicon Burle American Dynamics Pelco VideoBlox and MAXPRO switchers See Switchers on page 179 ADDING VIDEO INPUTS You can add video inputs and associate them to recorders and switchers See Video Inputs for more information ADDING VIDEO OUTPUTS You can add video outputs like standard device trunk VCR analog and digital monitors See Video Outputs for more information ADDING RELAYS You can add relays that can be connected to devices like switcher recorder cameras keyboard and high level device Relays send signals that perform various actions For example you can set a relay to open the door automatically when a motion is detected in a particular region See Relays for more information ADDING ALARM INPUTS You can add alarm input to raise alarms through an external device in MAXPRO VMS These alarm inputs can be associated to devices like switcher recorder cameras k
33. Host Name The name of the EBI Experion or HSS server if the recorder is used in conjunction with EBI Experion or HSS server None if the recorder is not used in conjunction with EBI Experion or HSS server General License Information Cameras The number of cameras licensed for your system IE Clients The number of Microsoft Internet Explorer clients licensed for your system Redundancy Indicates whether database server redundancy is licensed for your system Video Analytics License Information Premium Algorithm Indicates whether the premium algorithm is licensed for your system Object Tracking Algorithm The number of cameras licensed to use the object tracking algorithm Object Tracking and Classification The number of cameras licensed to use the Algorithm object tracking and classification algorithm Stationary Object Detection The number of cameras licensed to use the Algorithm stationary object detection algorithm Third Party License Information Third party licenses Click View Licenses to see the license details of third party products used by the recorder for functions such as video compression DISCOVERING DEVICES Discover devices feature allows you to discover the devices associated to recorders For example MAXPRO NVR EXACQ Panasonic MAXPRO VMS GeViscope EnduraExpress HRXD LG Milestone DigitalSentry Enterprise and Fusion RapidEye To discover
34. Install Figure 3 23 Select Features 3 Select MAXPRO VMS Client The MAXPRO VMS Framework Device Drivers and the Analytics Engine are selected automatically Clear the check boxes corresponding to the device drivers that you do not want to install Note If you are installing the drivers in a client PC and later if you upgrade the Client PC to Server PC then the respective driver scripts does not load the configurations in the MAXPRO VMS R310 Viewer User should run the corresponding script For example HRDPUnInstallationScript sql PelcolInstallationScript sql manually to load the configurations from the Tools Tools SQLScripts DVRScripts folder 56 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Custom Installation 4 Click Next The MAXPRO VMS Client configuration dialog box appears YMS R310 Enterprise Edition MAXPRO MS R310 Client configuration Enter the machine na WIN2K8 64BIT 1 Installed Figure 3 24 MAXPRO VMS Client Configuration 5 Inthe MaxproVMS Server box type the name of the MAXPRO VMS Server and then click Next A dialog box asking for confirmation to add the client workstation to MAXPRO VMS database appears Note If the MAXPRO VMS Server is not available then click Next WE Would you like to add the client workstation name in MAXPRO YMS R310 Database Figure 3 25 Confirmation Message MAXPRO VMS R310 Commi
35. Mirror Allow user to mirror view a video Preview Allow user to preview a video Remove Text Allow user to remove text overlay Overlay Analytics Add Analytics To add analytics server server Update Analytics To update analytics server server Delete Analytics To delete analytics server server Launch HVA To launch HVA configurator Configurator Launch HVA Live To launch HVA Live Monitor Monitor Reports and To access the reports and forsenics Foresenics Enable Analytics To allow user to enable the analytics option for camera Option for Camera 215 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Users Note To enable all the privileges select the Allow All check box and to deny all the privileges select the Deny All check box 9 From the User Type drop down list select System Local User or Windows User 10 In the Password box type the user password 11 In the Confirm Password box retype the user password 12 In the Pin Number box type the Pin number The Pin number is required only for Ultrakey keyboard and not required for MAXPRO VMS client login 13 In the Domain Name box type the name of the domain Currently this box is disabled 14 In the Keyboard Timeout Sec box type the time out value 15 In the Auto SignOff Period Sec box type the time out value 16 In the Sign On Macro box type the sign on macro 17 In the Sign Off Macro box type the sign off macro 18 Associate Partitions See Associating Partition
36. Rapdtyel2 x General Associated Partitions Figure 4 5 Recorder Partitions 6 Click Associate The Select Partitions dialog box appears Select Partitions x Partition name 0 0 0 0 o Partition 1 Figure 4 6 Select Partitions 7 Select the check box corresponding to the partition name you want to associate 8 Click OK The recorder is associated with the partition MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 99 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE To disassociate partition from a recorder e Select the check box corresponding to the partition name and then click Remove Note Partitions associated to a recorder cannot be removed unless they are removed from the devices that are connected to the same recorder ASSOCIATING EVENTS AND EVENT ATTRIBUTES TO A RECORDER You can associate one or more events to a recorder An alarm is triggered whenever any of the associated event occurs for the recorder For certain events you can also associate event attributes For example for an Encoder Disabled event you can associate attributes such as Encoder Name Encoder ID and so on For every attribute that you associate you can set a value based on which the event is triggered In the above example you can associate the attribute Encoder Name to the event and set its value as Encoder A When this event is associated to the recorder an alarm is raised when the event Encoder Disabled oc
37. The supported languages are Chinese German French and Arabic The default language is English Note You can localize the language using the localization tool For more details refer to the MAXPRO VMS R310 Localization Guide pdf which is available on the DVD 2 In the Username box type the user name The default user name is admin 3 In the Password box type the password The default password for the default user name admin is trinity 4 Inthe Profile box select the profile in which the server address is saved 5 Click The MAXPRO VMS dialog box is displayed You can set a profile as the default profile When a profile is set as default you need not select the profile each time you log on to MAXPRO VMS You can also modify and delete profiles Note Refer to the MAXPRO VMS R310 Help for more information on how to save server addresses in profiles how to set a profile as default profile and how to modify and delete profiles MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 303 VERIFYING THE CONFIGURATION MAXPRO VMS DT Checking the Device Listing in the Devices Window 304 Viewer Tab Devices Window MonitorTab Ti Pantions My Devices Window CHECKING THE DEVICE LISTING IN THE DEVICES WINDOW By default the Viewer tab is selected when you log on to MAXPRO VMS The Devices window lists the recorders and switchers along with the cameras connected t
38. me E a 0 Externatirpstt 40 me H ut Migration D ss an Tue i BS bere E gt 2 8 m Blas pm a tne s e External tS Bold 45 v we M ET D es buld45 40 scheduler D Banio Buldas DIRECT oren 0 tne xe oa Dtendrput Dudes M me alya hoireann O Extensis Migas DIRECT cren E ne ATP Server Setting pee Etonin 45 DIpECT OPEN me 4 Tenpiste Total Record Court 40 s SNNT o ROO 510 Figure 4 38 Alarm Input 3 Click Add The Alarm Input screen appears MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 195 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Etre detak Enabled Alam irott Name ste Figure 4 39 Adding an Alarm Input 4 The Enabled check box is selected by default Clear this check box to disable the alarm input 0 M mu alarm input In the Alarm Input Name box type the alarm input name From the Site drop down list select the required site In the Alarm Input Number box type the alarm input number In the Normal State drop down list select Open or Closed as the normal state for the 9 From the Operating Mode drop down list select the required mode The available modes are listed in the following table Modes Direct Description The alarm condition activates or de activates when it physical
39. to remove the cameras from the sequence Click Save REMOVING PRESETS FROM THE SEQUENCE You can remove a preset when you do not want it to be associated with a sequence To remove presets from a camera 1 Inthe Preset column delete the preset number next to the camera 234 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 2 Click Save LOCKING A SEQUENCE You can lock an existing sequence to prevent the users from modifying it To lock a sequence 1 Select the Locked check box 2 Click Save UPDATING A SEQUENCE Updating a sequence allows you to change the sequence of video display from cameras To update a sequence 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Groups in the navigation area and then click Sequences The Sequences screen appears in the display area 3 Select the check box corresponding to the sequence you want to update 4 Click Update You can change the sequence of the cameras DELETING A SEQUENCE To delete a sequence 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Groups in the navigation area and then click Sequences The Sequences screen appears in the display area 3 Select the check box corresponding to the sequence 4 Click Delete A confirmation message appears on top of the display area 5 Click Yes CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE 988809 opt ANALYTICS Analytics server enables smooth and effective daily surveillance operations Analytics system is efficient in taking vide
40. 2 Click Remove FILTERING THE EVENTS CONFIGURED To filter the events configured 1 In the Events Configured for Notification select the filter from the drop down list as shown below Or Type the filter name in the box The specified events are displayed in the table Sep Sheer ec ye sem encre El em x sno ws Senet iner contact gap Supt Saret device Tow record cure roro ws Orano ws ws Dup LL 5 uer orbit Cen orba Cortroxtput State Changed Database Server Accepts Connect Database Server oover Server Hook changed 4 Grown kers er ple oes SB Server Al Recorder B deeds T Sent rected MAXPROWS J WSI Corta Group 1 Fake ore MAPRO WHS MARO Ws 3 Contact Gap 1 ected MARONIS Contact Group 1 Tube HAPRONIRY Contact Gren 1 He Enterpese 233 Enterprise 233 Cortat Gap Fae ZI Lntecrie 233 Contact Group 1 SHUM Server Selly End Temple Remove Figure 4 81 Filtering the Events Configured MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 289 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE TO som Notification 2 Click Save ATTACHING CLIP You can attach a clip to the event configured for the notification To attach a clip to an event 1
41. 2 Expand User Management in the navigation area and then click Contact Group The Contact Group screen appears in the display area Select the check box corresponding to the contact group you want to update Click Update The settings for the contact group appear You can modify the settings MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 205 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE CONTACTS ADDING A CONTACT You can add and store a contact in MAXPRO VMS Only an user with administrator privileges can add contacts To add a contact 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand User Management in the navigation area and then click Contact The Contact screen appears in the display area gf iContact x ad Delete Contact F User rax anter ats Raber Trente I Total Record Count 0 Add co Apis Data LL Der 6 1445 Figure 4 42 Contact 3 Click Add The general settings for the contact appears Use to add multe En ID s Figure 4 43 Adding a Contact 4 Inthe User Name box type a name for the user 206 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP SITE Contacts 5 Inthe Email ID box type the email ID for the user if required 6 Click Save MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 207 A CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Users USERS A user in MAXPRO VMS is respo
42. 5 Management Corint Gas Om ATS trem 85 Digtal Fixed Comers Bud 65 Rev C Odak Duabled Camera rer Ow RTSP Strem 2005 Digital Mad Comer use 5 Rev C OMabled Comers Role t m RTSP Stren 3865 Fined Camera 65 Rev C 4 Detak Corea s ane E inm RTSP Stem 405 Camera But 65 Rev v Dew Torta D us is RTSP Stren 3045 Cata Camera Bold Kev C Camera Markt pni Mow ous RTSP Sarem 6865 Diges Fand Camera Bose 65 Res C Detach Commons Evert c RTSP 7865 ed Camara 65 Rev C 1 D fadk Cveablad Camera Intercept ns Conero s RTSP Stem 8845 Digital Fed Comers Rd GE Rev C u Deis nam Digtal Fed Comera Bud 6E Rey C 1 Desk Ores SB Server 13 Recorder ray Ban w Ac 1 Dt PTA Camera Ould GS RevC Sd Leu Pard Comer Bd 65 Re Detach 19 Association Salins Dagta Fined Camera 65 Rev 2 Dd Dsstied Comers ip Us Events Axio Auch Ped Camera Bud as Rev C x Odak Omabed Camera ow Migretior Dig FTZ Camera Buel 65 Rew pot em PANASONLC OBUC2381E 186 PTZ Camera used 6S Rev C E D e Caner E 1 Camera Managranent m Sd inar 3 Fani Comer Rid GS Rev C n Dish Coreg EQUIP Sees 55 Dogal Ford Comers Bul 68 Rey
43. Add or update To add or update surrounding camera Surrounding Camera Enable Disable To allow user to enable disable cameras cameras MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Roles Privileges Description Configure Privacy To configure the privacy settings Show Calender Search display the calender search Time Line TimeLine Access To allow user to access TimeLine window Clip Delete To delete video clips Image Delete To delete images Create Bookmark To create bookmark View Bookmark To view bookmark Delete Bookmark To delete bookmark Create Loop To allow user to create loop Update loop To allow user to update loop Clip Creation To allow user to create clips Configurator Configurator Access To allow user to access configurator Add Switcher To allow user to add switcher Update Switcher To allow user to update switcher Delete Switcher To allow user to delete switcher Add System Macro To allow user to add system macro Update System Macro allow user to update system macro Delete System Macro To allow user to delete system macro Add Logical Camera To allow user to add logical camera Update Logical To allow user to update logical camera Camera Delete Logical To allow user to delete logical camera Camera Add Relay To add
44. CLIENT AND THE SERVER COMPUTERS 2 Virtual Machine Specifications VIRTUAL MACHINE SPECIFICATIONS If you choose to provide your own virtual server solution for use with Honeywell MAXPRO VMS R310 VMS software the solution must meet or exceed the specifications listed in the following table Specification Description Minimum Processors Speed 3GHz Sockets 1 Cores per socket 2 Memory 8 GB Storage Two separate Disk LUN datastores on a local SCSI Fibre Channel or iSCSI Provisioned Thick Eager zeroed preferred Dedicated Datastore sized 120GB or larger is for the Windows operating system MAXPRO VMS server software and Microsoft SQL server software Dedicated Datastore 2 sized 120GB or larger is for the Microsoft SQL Server database files Networking One or more active VM Network adapters 1000Mb Full Duplex vmxnet 3 preferred Video Card Virtual Machine Video Card set to one display with 128MB total video memory Operating System For the VMware session install Windows Server 2008R2 or 2012 Standard Edition R2 Note You are responsible for the setup of the VMware ESXi host the Virtual Machine configuration options operating system software physical and virtual networking configuration and all other customer IT requirements Microsoft Windows Server 2008SE R2 SPI or 2012 Standard Edition must be installed per the Honeywell installation instructions included on the MAXPRO VMS instal
45. Centre 24 28 River Road West Parramatta NSW 2150 Australia www honeywellsecurity com au 61 2 8837 9300 Honeywell Security Asia Pacific 33 F Tower A City Center 100 Zun Yi Road Shanghai 200051 China www asia security honeywell com 86 21 2527 4568 Honeywell Security Asia Flat A 16 F CDW Building 388 Castle Peak Road Tsuen Wan N T Hong Kong www asia security honeywell com 852 2405 2323 Honeywell Security France Parc Gutenberg 8 Voie La Cardon 91120 Palaiseau France www honeywell com security fr 33 01 64 53 80 40 Honeywell Security Italia SpA Via Treviso 2 4 31020 San Vendemiano Treviso Italy www honeywell com security it 39 04 38 36 51 Honeywell Security Espa a Mijancas 1 3 Planta P Ind Las Mercedes 28022 Madrid Spain www honeywell com security es 34 902 667 800 Honeywell Video Systems Northern Europe Netwerk 121 1446 WV Purmerend The Netherlands www honeywell com security nl 5 31 299 410 200 Honeywell Systems Group Aston Fields Road Whitehouse Ind Est Runcorn Cheshire WA7 3DL UK www honeywell com security uk T 44 0 1928 756999 Honeywell Security South Africa Unit 6 Galaxy Park 17 Galaxy Avenue Linbro Park P O Box 59904 2100 Kengray Johannesburg South Africa www honeywell co za 95 27 11 574 2500 Honeywell Security Deutschland Johannes Mauthe StraBe 14 D 72458 Albstadt Germany www security honeywell com de 95 49 74 31 8 01 0 Honeywell Security Pol
46. Click Add By default the Partition ID and Description are displayed Note You can change the default Partition ID and Description 4 Click Save DELETING A PARTITION You can delete a partition when you no longer need it Before deleting a partition ensure that you disassociate all video devices and unassign the user Before you begin Disassociate all the devices relays users and roles associated to the partition To delete a partition 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Groups in the navigation area and then click Partitions The Partitions screen appears in the display area Select the check box corresponding to the partition you want to remove 4 Click Delete A confirmation message appears on the top of the display area Click Yes MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 243 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE 994 WORKSTATIONS A client workstation is a computer in which the MAXPRO VMS user interface is installed A user can log on to MAXPRO VMS interface through workstations and perform various operations WORKSTATIONS AND USERS Users are directly associated to the workstation which is associated to the role user can be associated to other workstations which are not associated to a role See Associating Workstations to the Users for more information WORKSTATIONS AND ROLES Workstations are associated to Roles Roles are assigned to users which enables them to log on
47. Commissioning and Installation Guide 127 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Ov Settings Description Archive urgent The period for which urgent alarm recordings are available for alarms after playback before they are automatically archived If set this must be less than the Delete urgent alarms after period otherwise the clips are deleted before they can be archived The duration commences at the clip s end date and time Delete urgent The period for which urgent alarm recordings are stored before alarms after being deleted The duration commences at the clip s end date and time 6 Configure the settings in the I O Activated area The following table lists the settings in the I O Activated area Settings Description Pre record for The duration of video that the IP Engine keeps in memory When user initiates the recording in viewer tab the IP Engine inserts this pre record segment at the start of the recording Configuring a pre record period on the recording allows you to view what was happening before the recording started For example if you set this to 10 seconds the recording shows the 10 seconds of video before the recording is activated Record for Duration for which the recording is done after the user action Record frame rate Frame rate at which the video is recorded for user activated recordings Archive after Period for which user activated recordings are available for playba
48. Dee S051 PES Figure 4 21 Camera Analytics Select Enable Analytics From the Analytics Server drop down list select the required analytics server From the Package Type drop down list select the required package data In the resolution settings select Enable QCIF to set the QCIF resolution if required Click Save oe DIR we FILTERING AND GROUPING THE VIDEOINPUT S Filter feature enables you to filter and group the required number of video input columns Filtering video inputs can be performed in two ways a By dragging and dropping specific column headers to group with the other columns b By defining the row values to display the required columns To filter and group the video input s columns 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Devices in the navigation area 3 Click the VideoInput s node The VideoInput s screen appears in the display area MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 155 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING A SITE TO ices ints Videoinputs x Recorders s 06 13 Ls pde Dein 463 Recorders rat cham hescar wed hara to guo by that ctn Wim Odds Cotniders Descrpbon Type Ti fenaa Ti Saudas AN Noa Saidali Y Sis i 4 Mrs Digtal fusi Camera 5 Rev C D po on 1 Digital Fd Camara Bud 65 Rev C 5 Dele Cine
49. Enable Disable To enable or disable the cameras Camera Configure Privacy To configure the privacy settings Show Calender To display the calender search Search Time Line TimeLine Access To allow the user to access TimeLine window Clip Delete To delete video clips Image Delete To delete images Create Bookmark To create bookmark View Bookmark To view bookmark Delete Bookmark To delete bookmark Create Loop To allow user to create loop Update loop To allow user to update loop Clip Creation To allow user to create clips Configurator Configurator To allow user to access configurator Access Add Switcher To allow user to add switcher Update Switcher To allow user to update switcher Delete Switcher To allow user to delete switcher Add System Macro allow user to add system macro Update System To allow user to update system macro Macro Delete System To allow user to delete system macro Macro Add Logical To allow user to add logical camera Camera Update Logical To allow user to update logical camera Camera Delete Logical To allow user to delete logical camera Camera Add Relay To add relay MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 211 212 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP SITE Users Privileges Description Update Relay To update relay Delete Relay To delete relay Add Alarm Input To add an alarm input Update Alarm To update an alarm input Input Delete Alarm Input delet
50. If you choose for Fresh installation and Server is Selected without SQL instance Installs the SQL Express 2012 SP1 and Create Database It displays an error message as shown below MAXPRO VHS RITO E xj For Windows 7 or 2008 R2 Service Pack 1 later is required for eG instaling SQL Express 2012 SP 1 Please download and install SQL Express 2008 R2 and start the installation again Installation wil abort now I t If you choose for Fresh installation and Server is selected local SQL Standard Edition instance is selected Creates the Database in the selected SQL Standard instance of any version Create Database in the selected SQL Standard instance of any version If you choose for Fresh installation and Server is Selected local SQL Express 2008 R2 Installs the SQL 2008 R2 SP1 If Required and Upgrade to SQL Express 2012 SP1 Upgrade Database Create Database in SQL Express 2008 R2 instance If you choose for Fresh installation and Server is Selected local SQL Express 2012 SP1 Creates the Database This scenario is not possible If you choose for Fresh installation and Server is selected Remote SQL Creates the Database Create Database 72 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE SQL Express 2012 Scenarios If you choose for Fresh installation and Client is selected Client compone
51. Inthe System Password box type the system password assigned to the recorder Inthe Video Format drop down list select the required video format Enterprise Inthe Site Address box type the numeric IP address or the host name of the Enterprise recorder Click Ping to verify the connection The field appears in green if the IP address or the host name is valid Select the Check for duplicate IP address device name in the database check box to check the availability of the IP Address host name in database Inthe Redundant Site Address box type the redundant IP address or the host name for the recorder The redundant IP address is chosen when the primary IP address is unavailable Inthe User ID box type the user name to access the recorder Inthe Password1 Password2 and Password 3 boxes type the respective passwords assigned to access the recorder e Select the Time Zone check box to enable the global time zone box and select the required time zone Inthe Date Format to Display drop down list select the date format as a applicable to the recorder 86 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP SITE Recorders Recorder Type To configure the device settings Fusion Inthe Site Address box type the numeric IP address or the host name of the Fusion recorder Click Ping to verify the connection The field appears in green if the IP address or th
52. NVIDIA Quadro NVS300 512 MB Network Connection 1Gbit sec or greater Table 2 5 MAXPRO VMS Workstation Computer Performance Spec with Windows 8 1 Professional 32 Bit and 64 Bit Windows 7 64 bit and 32 bit supports up to 4 monitors Specification Description workstation is used for exporting recordings Processor Intel Core 17 4770K 3 5 GHz Recommended Microsoft Windows 7 or 8 2 32 amp 64 bit Operating System Recommended Workstation Computer Type Server or Workstation Recommended System 8 GB Memory RAM DVD Drive RW Read DVD RW Write is required if MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 23 24 SETTING UP THE CLIENT AND THE SERVER COMPUTERS Hardware Specifications Table 2 5 MAXPRO VMS Workstation Computer Performance Spec with Windows 8 1 Professional 32 Bit and 64 Bit Windows 7 64 bit and 32 bit supports up to 4 monitors Specification Description Disk 250GB 7200RPM SATA3 Multiple Monitor Card NVIDIA Quadro NVS510 2GB Display Adapter Video Resolution Network Connection 1Gbit sec or greater Table 2 6 MAXPRO VMS Workstation Computer with Prowatch client Performance Spec with Windows 8 1 Professional 32 Bit and 64 Bit Windows 7 64 bit and 32 bit supports up to 2 monitors Specification Description workstation is used for exporting recordings Processor Quad C
53. Note The valid slot numbers are 1 32 for I O and combination video I O subracks and 1 for HD Series subracks For VideoBlox subrack this represents the physical control input slot number from AVBPIT alarm concentrator Valid range is 1 to 255 4 Inthe Output Bit section select the required output that needs to be controlled by the relay Each relay can control one or more output bits Click Select if you want all the output bits to be controlled by a single relay 5 Click Save MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 191 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE CONNECTING RELAY TO THE NETWORK To connect relay to a network 1 Inthe Network box type the network node and the video input device number from which you want the video input 2 Click Save CONNECTING THE RELAY TO THE RECORDER Before you begin e Add Recorders See Adding a Recorder for more information To connect relay to a analog camera 1 From the Recorder drop down list select the required recorder The Output Settings appear In the Relay ID box type the relay ID number for the recorder In the Site ID box type the site ID of the recorder In the Station ID box type the station ID of the recorder In the Digital IO Type type the digital IO type of the recorder In the Output Bit section select the required output that needs to be controlled by the relay Each relay can control one or more output bits Clic
54. Notification and Creating an Email Template for more information MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders RECORDERS Recorders are devices used for streaming video and recording video from surveillance cameras analog cameras and IP based digital cameras RECORDERS AND PARTITIONS A partition is a logical grouping of video devices Partitions are associated to recorders You can restrict a non associated user of the partition from viewing or changing the settings of the recorder RECORDERS AND EVENTS Events are predefined actions Recorders have predefined events by default An alarm is triggered whenever an event is generated For example when a camera is added to a recorder an event CameraAdded is generated You can also associate event attributes to events ADDING A RECORDER Before you begin e Add Site See Adding a Site for more information e Add Partition See Adding a Partition for more information e Add Event Groups See Adding an Event Group for more information By default a site partition and event groups are available You can associate the recorder to them or create new To add a recorder 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Devices in the navigation area and then click Recorders The Recorders screen appears in the display area 3 Click Add The General Settings screen for the recorder appears Deve Naa
55. Partitions are associated to the users They can view and manage the video devices that are grouped inside the associated partitions PARTITIONS AND ROLES Partitions are associated to roles Roles are assigned to users A user can view and manage the video devices that are grouped inside the associated partitions PARTITIONS AND VIDEO DEVICES Partitions are associated to devices like cameras recorders switchers and monitors Users associated to a partition can view and manage all the devices grouped inside it PARTITIONS AND MONITORS Partitions are associated to monitors Users associated to a partition can perform surveillance operations through monitors associated in that group ADDING A PARTITION You can add a partition by specifying a unique identification number and a description Note By default a global partition is added in MAXPRO VMS and all video devices are associated to it To add a partition 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Groups in the navigation area and then click Partitions The Partitions screen appears in the display area 242 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Partitions Partitions x user Can Perform Add Save and Delete Operations To Configure Pasttion patre im Description De 28 9 IP Camera Management 9 senes Total Record Court 1 Figure 4 55 Partitions 3
56. S088 Cta rod Camera Bud 6 Rev C 1 Delak Camera Marks She nw ne RTSP Strem EBES Fand Camera Bui 65 Rev C L Greg ela Ow w RTSP 265 Fed Comers Suid 65 Rev 1 D fsdk Owablad rr ogee se m RTSP Stren ORES Digtal Fined Comers Rd 48 Rev C u Dsk Corre B na w HOSEL Digtal eoi Camera Bolt 65 Rey C m Deni Ores Recorder ray in Ac IP Digtal PT Camera Dud 6S Rev Camera spall t ord Urat Bald 85 Rew 1s Delat Disabled Carter 09 5 Association r Sad ira 2 med Camera 65 Rev C 2 Deok Camera ji dies Cert Events Everk Aaxloton p Auc Opta nera tu 0 Rev C x Odak Camera Dow Migration PTZ Camera Built 65 Rev Det Dsatisd Camera Inport anh Opta Camere uss 6S Rev C D wk Desbled 2 camer 5 a Caged Fami Camis Baad 65 Rew n Disk Ded Sees D Fired Comers Bold 65 Rev E Detach Camera Shedding 5 i D b 051 Lt 2 ww 5 Counts ino SM Mains 11121 5 Figure 4 16 Video Inputs 3 Click Add The Camera screen appears by default s Mordes gm Mdeoinous Comero330 x b vns Evenes S Recorders ter video detoks deo Outputs General a Comes Tyre 5 x Drees Type km G
57. SERVER COMPUTERS About Serial Expander devices such as switchers joystick controllers Ultrak keyboard and PITs used at the location The following figure illustrates a serial expander cable Serial ports to connect serial devices Serial port to connect the server computer Each of the eight serial ports in the serial expander cable is marked with a number This number is used for identifying the serial port while configuring the settings such as baud rate data bits and others using the MAXPRO VMS software The following figure illustrates the serial port numbering in the serial expander cable Serial port numbers MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide SETTING UP THE CLIENT AND THE SERVER COMPUTERS Enabling Windows NET 3 5 ENABLING WINDOWS NET 3 5 This section describes the procedure to enable NET 3 5 on Windows 8 and Server 2012 machine with without internet connection Note This section is not applicable for Windows 7 and Server 2008 machines to enable NET 3 5 To enable NET 3 5 on Windows 8 machine using internet connection 1 Click Start Control Panel Programs and Features The Programs and Features window appears C All Control Panel Items Programs and Features v Search Programs and Features Control Panel Home Uninstall or change program View installed updates To uninstall program select it from the list and then
58. SETTING UP A SITE TM aep 3 Select True To assign severity level 1 Select the check box corresponding to the event you want assign severity level 2 Double click on the Severity Level box and edit the severity level Note Severity level is set to trigger alarms when the threshold is met For example if the threshold is set 50 in the preferences tab an alarm is triggered when threshold becomes 51 To enter remarks 1 Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to enter remarks 2 Click the Remarks box and type the remarks To assign macros 1 Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to assign macros 2 Click the Start Procedure box and then type the required macro 3 Click the End Procedure box and then type the required macro ASSOCIATING EVENT ATTRIBUTES Before you begin Associate events To associate event attributes 1 Select the check box corresponding to the event for which you want to associate event attributes The Event attributes Settings appear in the lower pane 2 Click Associate The Select Available Event Attributes dialog box appears 3 Select the check box corresponding to the event attributes that you want to associate 4 Click OK To disassociate event attributes from a analytics e Select the check box corresponding to the event attribute and then click Remove The following table describes the event name event attributes and their description
59. Series subracks HMX32128 device control and I O functions are mapped to pseudo slots as all of these functions exist on the subrack controller card HMX128 located in slot 0 For VideoBloxsubrack the control slot number should be greater than zero Valid range 1 to 4 d In the Offset box type the ID number of the PTZ site receiver connected to that camera Note The valid range for site IDs is 1 16 A O indicates that a hardwired relay output module is being used in the subrack slot for controlling that camera Offset is the hardware address configured in the PTZ camera Switcher The followings settings are used when a PTZ camera is controlled by a matrix switcher a In the Select Switcher drop down list select the switcher b Inthe Source Control ID box a default ID is displayed Note The valid range for Control ID is 1 799 a value of 0 indicates no control capability for the device c In the Source Control Slot box type the slot number within the control subrack where the controller for the current video input device resides Note Valid slot numbers are 1 32 for I O and combination video I O subracks and 1 8 for HD Series subracks Within subracks such as HMX1132 and HMX1600 the control slot is the physical slot where the controller card resides Whereas within HD Series subracks HMX32128 device control and I O functions are mapped to pseudo slots as all of these functions exist on the s
60. THE RELAY tos pare dete aab I rte tae dte ER ne i 193 UPDATING THE RELAY hr hr 194 ALARM INPUTS oo ae HE OR ne Go te CARS ae Sh Sad etm 195 DELETING THE ALARM INPUT 0 ccc cee cen hrs 203 UPDATING THE ALARM INPUT llle ehh hh ha 203 CONTACT GROUP 4 23 eae RARO 204 DELETING THE CONTACT GROUP 000 cece has 205 UPDATING THE CONTACT GROUP 5944 9 5 54 hh 205 CONTACTS AP METTE 206 ADDING A CONTAGCT Ier aere dc esae ed XC od ced bd Lo ue dcbet ted x 206 USERS 14 450 P owC C 208 ADDING A USER s cerr 42 04 045 coda ex SON xe ERO EE ke E es Sled 208 DISCOVERING AND IMPORTING USERS hh 220 UPDATING USER prie ue or dba ep OR UR CUR dee weed BP RUD e 221 DELETING A USER 22 43 gh Eton eens dee eee Pies lee d dero usce Poe a ed hee ae 221 ROLES 514 RR Ue dail Rb oe A EROR UE dad VR bed alee bd 222 ADDING A ROLE hee hoe Rea de Ra ee A dcc we dc oe 222 UPDATING A ROLE IRE RE EE eR obey be RE RR e lod E RS EE ene 231 DELETING A ROLE dehinc aed E ROC ee ae eee Ra 231 SEQUENCES 4 eo dee dedu desc ed eee ees eae 233 CREATING A SEQUENCE
61. The following figure illustrates My Devices window Figure 5 9 My Devices window Note For more information on how to add a video source to My Devices window and how to create folders to group them refer to the MAXPRO VMS R310 Help MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 319 VERIFYING THE CONFIGURATION OF MAXPRO VMS DW Checking the Search for Recorded Video CHECKING THE SEARCH FOR RECORDED VIDEO Operators can search for recorded video events bookmarks from cameras connected to the recorders The Search tab looks similar to the following figure Search tab Salvo layout selection Search Filter drop gt down list 4 LEELEE EILO Type filter based on the selection in the Search for drop down list Figure 5 10 Search tab Note For more information on how to search for recorded video clips and bookmarks and how to play the search results refer to the MAXPRO VMS R310 Help 320 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide Reports Window VERIFYING THE CONFIGURATION OF MAXPRO VMS Checking the Generation of Event History and Operator Log Report CHECKING THE GENERATION OF EVENT HISTORY AND OPERATOR LOG REPORT EE Two types of reports namely event histo
62. The following table lists the settings for both Database Cleanup and Database Backup Settings Instructions Database Backup e In the Backup Path At Server box type the path to back up the data Note The backup path must not contain any spaces in the directory name e In the Backup Type section click Full Backup or Differential Backup as per your requirement Note Differential backup contains all files changed since the last full backup Ensure that a full back up is taken at least once before the differential back Database Cleanup Select Event History or Audit Log or both as per the requirement Inthe Cleanup Criteria select All if you want to clean up all records in the database Or e Select Last and then type the number of days from when the records should be cleaned For example if you type 30 then the records of the last 30 days are cleaned Or Select Last and then type the number of records to be cleaned For example if you type 30 then the last 30 records that were created are deleted 8 Onthe Frequency tab specify the following settings Settings Instructions Start From Specify the start date and time End By Specify the end date and time No End Date Select this option if you do not want any end date for any schedules 286 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP SITE Jobs Settings
63. To disassociate events from a recorder Select the check box corresponding to the event and then click Remove To add event groups to events 1 Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to add the event group 2 Double click the value under the Event Group column The Select EventGroup dialog box appears Select EventGroup jv eventGroupName 0 0 0 0 0 EventGroup1 Figure 4 9 Select Event Group 3 Select the check box corresponding to the event group you want to add 4 Click OK MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 101 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Note You need to add an event group before you associate it to an event See Adding an Event Group for more information To disable an event 1 Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to disable 2 Click the text under the Disabled column A drop down list is enabled 3 Select True To assign severity level 1 Select the check box corresponding to the event you want assign severity level 2 Click the value under the Severity Level column and edit the severity level Note Severity level is set to trigger alarms when the threshold is met For example if the threshold is set 50 in the preferences tab an alarm is triggered when threshold becomes 51 To enter remarks 1 Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to enter remarks 2 Click the text under the Remarks
64. Type an alarm finish macro When a detected alarm input returns to its normal state the alarm finish macro is executed Global ID Type a unique global ID If the Global Event ID is not assigned MAXPRO VMS assigns a unique global ID automatically when you save the event settings Severity Type a severity level Note Severity level is set to trigger alarms when the threshold is met For example if the threshold is set 50 in the preferences tab an alarm is triggered when threshold becomes 51 4 Onthe Event Groups tab select the check box corresponding to the event group that you want to associate to the alarm input and then click Associate 5 Click Save CONNECTING ALARM INPUT TO THE KEYBOARD To connect alarm input to a keyboard 1 From the keyboard drop down list select the required joystick controller The keyboard settings appear MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 201 202 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Alarm Inputs 2 the Advanced Settings tab specify the following details Settings Subrack ID Description The Subrack ID number where the alarm input resides is displayed automatically Note The valid range is 1 99 If a high level or mimic panel output is used the number is prefixed with an If a keyboard output is used the number is prefixed with a For VideoBlox subrack this represents the V communication port numbe
65. VMS R310 Software 2 The Setup Type dialog box appears MAXPRO YMS R310 Enterprise Edition Setup Type setup type that best The Installshield Wizard will let you Modify Remove MAXPRO VMS R310 Enterprise Edition installer Install Re Installshield lt Back Next meena i Figure 3 43 Setup Type 3 Select Remove Few and then click Next The Select the features dialog box similar to the following figure appears MAXPRO YMS R310 Enterprise Edition Select the features Select the Feat want to uninstall Select the Features you want to uninstall escriptio MAXPRO VMS Client fap el MAXPRO YMS Framework Uninstalls MAXPRO VMS s i drivers For interacting with WES Cen Milestone DYR Drivers RapidEye Fusion Enterprise IP Engine HRXD HRDP DigitalSentry MaxproNVR MaxprovMS LG Exacq instalis Cancel Figure 3 44 Select the Features 4 Select the components that you wish to remove by selecting the respective check boxes If you select the Analytics driver to uninstall and click Next then Restoring Analytics Database figure appears as shown below MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Removing the MAXPRO VMS R310 Software MAXPRO MS R310 Enterprise Edition Restoring Analytics Database Do you want to retain the 4n
66. address of the second subrack that is to be bypassed when selecting the current video input device The valid address values range from 0 signifying no cascading or combining are used through 99 4 Inthe Combiner Input Number box type the address to which the preselector subrack for the current video input is connected 5 Inthe Dynamic Equalization box type the value between 1 and 8 to represent the cable length between the video input and the switcher It serves to improve video quality by compensating for cable related transmission losses Note The values 1 8 represent one hundred meters of RG 59 BU units coaxial cable 6 Inthe Video Fail Slot box type the slot number where the video fail detector module is located Note The valid subrack slot numbers are 11 14 HD Series subracks HMX32128 perform video fail detection on the HMX128 subrack controller card This is mapped to pseudo slots as follows MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 145 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE OO v Video Input Video Fail Slot 1 32 11 33 64 12 65 96 13 97 128 14 Note For VideoBlox subrack the Video fail slot must be 1 Enter 0 if video fail detection is not required 7 Inthe Start Macro box type the desired macro number to execute Start Macro whenever a video alarm condition is detected for the corresponding video input device 8 Inthe End Macro box type the de
67. allows you to perform panning and tilting on the video display that is zoomed or enlarged in a panel You need to perform both analog and digital PTZ on cameras to verify the functioning Note For more information on how to perform analog and digital PTZ refer to the MAXPRO VMS R310 Help MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 311 VERIFYING THE CONFIGURATION OF MAXPRO VMS BEEN Checking for Acknowledgement and Clearing of Alarms CHECKING FOR ACKNOWLEDGEMENT AND CLEARING OF ALARMS Alarms notify the occurrence of events and event attributes to the operators You can configure alarms to be triggered when events such as recorder disk space nearing full motion detection and others happen The event attributes that are associated to events are listed in the details of the alarm in Alarm window The events that trigger an alarm can be selected while configuring the recorders cameras and switchers Events can be associated to event groups Each alarm goes through the following states New or Unacknowledged When an alarm is triggered it appears in the Alarm window You can click the Alarm tab to view the Alarm window The state of the alarm after it is triggered is referred to as unacknowledged You can view the list of all the unacknowledged alarms in a table in the Alarm window The following figure illustrates the Alarm window Figure 5 6 Alarm window The number of unacknowledged alarms is displayed
68. analytics application 10 From the Language drop down list select the required language 11 Click Next The Start Copying Files dialog box appears MS R310 Enterprise Edition Start Copying Files Res tings befor g the program files sfied with the settings Installation Summary aant a a a a i a a a a a i a a ai a a a ti i a a ai a a a a a a a a a a ORR Total Approximate Time to Install Pre Requisites 2 mins Total Approximate Time to Install MAXPRO VMS Products 37 mins akoko tooo aE Estimated Time Break Up For Pre Requisites esee RR RH RE A 1 mins Microsoft Redistributable 2008 Add On 1 mins Microsoft Visual C 2010 x86 Redistributable Estimated Time Break Up For MAXPRO MS Components aee seo abe a aR aR RAR RRR A RRR A ACR RRR e RRR A RR RR A RE Figure 3 28 Start Copying Files MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 59 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Custom Installation 12 Click Next The MAXPRO VMS client is installed and the InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box appears MAXPRO MS R310 Enterprise Edition InstallShield Wizard Complete 310 Click Finish to exit the InstallShield Figure 3 29 Install Shield Wizard Complete 13 Click Finish The computer restarts and the installation is complete Note At any point if the R310 installation f
69. and password below MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Video Analytics Server Installation Note See SQL Express 2012 Scenarios for various SQL 2012 Scenarios If you enter an invalid Login ID and Password to connect SQL Server then see Manual Steps if SQL Connection Fails 7 Click Next The Language selection for analytics application dialog box appears MAXPRO YMS R310 Enterprise Edition Language selection for analytics application Language e Installed Figure 3 34 Language Selection for Analytics Application 8 Click Next The Start Copying Files dialog box appears MAXPRO YMS R310 Enterprise Edition Start Copying Files Installed Figure 3 35 Start Copying Files MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 63 64 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Video Analytics Server Installation 9 Click Next The video Analytics is installed and the InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box appears MAXPRO YMS R310 Enterprise Edition InstallShield Wizard Complete ld Wizard has st ssfully installed MAXPRO YMS R310 Click Finish to exit the InstallShield 3 Back Y Figure 3 36 Install Shield Wizard Complete 10 Click Finish Your computer restarts and the installation is complete Note At any point if the R310 installation fails to install the selected component you can clean the system using th
70. any of the test modes by selecting ALT F1 to ALT F10 on the Qwerty keyboard Equipment Polling Failed Macro e Select an Equipment Polling status Inthe Equipment Fail Macro box type the desired macro Types of equipment that can be polled are Subracks e High Level Mimic Panels Keyboards e Network nodes MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP SITE Trinity Controller Settings Instructions Description Pretext Status Select the required pretext status Note the pretext modules in the system must be of the standard or enhanced type It is not possible to mix types This does not apply to post text modules which are defined in the video outputs section You can select the Enhanced Text Card or the Hidden Text Card but not both The Shadow and Double Height features can both be selected for either type text card e Printer Errorlog Reporting Settings Instructions Description Event Group Type the required event group Errorlog Printing Select Errorlog Printing if you want to send the error log messages to printer Sign On Off Select Sign On Off to send a report to printer whenever a user is signed on or signed off Errorlog Reporting Select the type of error log messages that needs to be sent to the printer 8 Click Save to change the updates COLD AND WARM Yo
71. available and the recording settings for the camera must be configured You can find out the status of the camera by the colored indicator on the camera icon in the site view If the indicator on the camera icon is green means the camera is active If the indicator on the camera is red means it is recording Note Refer to the MAXPRO VMS R310 Help for more information on how to configure the recording settings for the cameras connected to the various recorders Recorded video can be played from the Timeline window The following figure illustrates the Timeline window ae Figure 5 3 Time line window When you select a camera to view video a timeline corresponding to the camera appears in the Timeline window The name of the camera appears on the left of the timeline To play recorded video from a camera you can click the timeline at the point from which you want to play video A timescale is displayed in the lower part of the Timeline window You can refer to the divisions in the timescale to locate the date and time You can also select a date and time from which you want to play recorded video using the date and time options in the timeline window Color codes are used in the timeline to indicate the availability of video recording for the cameras connected to the recorder The time duration for which recording is available is indicated in green color The time duration for which recording is not available is
72. cece ee een hh 114 UPDATING A RECORDER 0 116 DELETING A RECORDER esee eR em e EROR E ho SOR Gain and e ed OR Bn ee Doe 116 VIDEO INPUTS aues 54 SA dH pad dea 117 ADDING VIDEO INPUTS 5224s ora ew ac Eve aora yu cea xa Rb ea E Rue ee 117 ADDINGAA CAMEBR A notae Fecit ana te rog tec ec oro e e RU te e TRE ca whe OR e 119 ASSOCIATING EVENTS AND EVENT ATTRIBUTES TO A VIDEO 149 ASSOCIATING PARTITIONS TO VIDEO INPUTS lesse he 154 AXSSOCIATING ANALYTICS per rer erene EN wank ee DER DUE nate Gand LR a boe 155 FILTERING AND GROUPING THE VIDEOINPUT S 155 SORTING VIDEO INPUT S erraria naia hh ahhh 160 UPDATING A VIDEO INPUT 0 cece hara 161 DELETING A VIDEO INPUT har 161 ADDING A VIDEO INPUT DEVICE 162 ADDING A VIDEO INPUT DEVICE DIGITAL INPUT TRUNK 162 VIDEO QUTPUTS c2 BEER Se SEEKS RSE i24 pague iu 164 ADDING VIDEO OUTPUTS 0 00 cece eee ETNE EEE ENE 164 ADDING MONITORS 5 1 rb wns Ohana and Boe ARR RR n e RR aoe 166 ADDING A VIDEO OUTPUT DEVICE STANDARD DEVICE SMART DEVICE VCR STANDBY 169 ADDING A VIDEO OUTPUT DEVICE TRUNK sss 170 ADDING A VIDEO OUTPUT DEVICE DIGITAL OUTPU
73. click Uninstall Change or Repair Turn Windows features on or off Organize Uninstall Repair 8 X Name Publisher HMIWebCompatibility InstallWatch Pro 2 5 MANDIANT Intelligent Response Agent MANDIANT McAfee Agent McAfee Inc U McAfee VirusScan Enterprise McAfee Inc Ug Microsoft Office 2010 Primary Interop Assemblies Microsoft C Be Microsoft Office Standard 2010 Microsoft C Microsoft Silverlight Microsoft C Microsoft Visual C 2005 Redistributable Microsoft C Microsoft Visual C 2005 Redistributable x64 Microsoft C Microsoft Visual C 2008 Redistributable x64 9 0 30729 4148 Microsoft Microsoft Visual C 2008 Redistributable x86 9 0 30729 4148 Microsoft C Microsoft Visual C 2010 x64 Redistributable 10 0 40219 Microsoft C Microsoft Visual C 2010 x86 Redistributable 10 0 40219 Microsoft C j9 Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Tools for Office Runtime x64 Microsoft C v Mware Tools VMware Ini Cin Microsoft Corporation Product version 14 0 4763 1150 oa Size 6 80 MB Figure 1 1 Program and Features MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 27 28 SETTING UP THE CLIENT AND THE SERVER COMPUTERS Enabling Windows NET 3 5 2 3 Under Control Panel Home pane click Turn Windows features on or off link The Windows Features dialog box appears Turn Windows features on or off To turn a feature on select its check box
74. column and type the remarks To assign macros 1 Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to assign macros 2 Click the box under the Start Procedure column and then type the required macro 3 Click the box under the End Procedure column and then type the required macro ASSOCIATING EVENT ATTRIBUTES Before you begin Associate events To associate event attributes 1 Select the check box corresponding to the event for which you want to associate event attributes The Event attributes Settings appear in the lower pane 2 Click Associate The Select Available Event Attributes dialog box appears 3 Select the check box corresponding to the event attributes that you want to associate 4 Click OK To disassociate event attributes from a recorder e Select the check box corresponding to the event attribute and then click Remove 102 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP SITE Recorders The following table describes the event name event attributes and their description Recorder IP Engine Event Name Event Attribute Description Attributes ReplicationHealth Health Status Possible health values like Changed OK Failure and Unknown RedundancyConfi PreferedDatabase Computer name of the gurationChanged ServerName preferred Database server RedundantDataba Computer name of the seServerName preferred D
75. connect alarm input to a recorder 1 From the Recorder drop down list select the required recorder The recorder settings appear 2 Inthe Alarm Input ID text box under Input Settings tab type the Alarm Input ID 3 On the Event Settings tab specify the following details Settings Event Description Description Type a description for the event Start Macro Type an alarm start macro When an alarm condition is detected for an alarm input the alarm start macro is executed Finish Macro Type an alarm finish macro When a detected alarm input returns to its normal state the alarm finish macro is executed Global ID Type a unique global ID If the Global Event ID is not assigned MAXPRO VMS assigns a unique global ID automatically when you save the event settings Severity Type a severity level Note Severity level is set to trigger alarms when the threshold is met For example if the threshold is set 50 in the preferences tab an alarm is triggered when threshold becomes 51 4 the Event Groups tab select the check box corresponding to the event group that you want to associate to the alarm input and then click Associate 5 Click Save 6 For connecting alarm input to a Enterprise see Connecting to Enterprise CONNECTING TO ENTERPRISE 1 the Input Settings tab specify the following details Site ID Type the site ID of the recorder Statio
76. destination server 4 Click Select a server from the server pool option and then select the current machine name listed under Server Pool Click Next Select server roles screen appears DESTINATION SERVER Select server roles WIN KHNMQUSE2845 Before You Begin Select one or more roles to install on the selected server Installation Type Roles Description Server Selection Application Server provides central management and hosting of high Active Directory Domain Services performance distributed business Active Directory Federation Services applications such as those built with Enterprise Services and NET Framework 4 5 Active Directory Certificate Services Features Active Directory Lightweight Directory Services Active Directory Rights Management Services DHCP Server DNS Server Fax Server File And Storage Services Installed Hyper V Network Policy and Access Services Print and Document Services Remote Access Remote Desktop Services Figure 1 7 Select Server Roles 5 Under Roles select the Application server Installed check box and then click Next The Add Roles and Features Wizard appears MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide SETTING UP THE CLIENT AND THE SERVER COMPUTERS Enabling Windows NET 3 5 Note The Add Roles and Features Wizard displayed d
77. event group from MAXPRO VMS Before deleting an event group ensure that you disassociate the users and monitors from it Before you begin e Disassociate Video Outputs Associating Events and Event Attributes to a Video Input for more information e Disassociate Users See Associating Event Groups to Users for more information To delete an event group 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Groups in the navigation area and then click Event Groups The Event Groups screen appears in the display area Select the check box corresponding to the event group you want to remove Click Delete A confirmation message appears on the top of the display area MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 247 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE 5 Click Yes 248 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Intercept Keys INTERCEPT KEYS Frequently used or repetitive sequence of keystrokes can be automated using intercept keys INTERCEPT KEYS AND J OYSTICK CONTROLLERS Joystick controllers Ultrakey keyboards are associated to intercept keys You can program the keys in the Ultrakey keyboard to perform an action by associating intercept keys to them For example a key can be programmed to select a panel in the salvo layout ADDING INTERCEPT KEY To add an intercept key 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Groups in the navigation area and then click Int
78. for analytics application Language English M Cancel Figure 3 11 Language selection for analytics application 7 From the Language drop down list select the required language MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 47 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Complete Installation 8 Click Next The Start Copying Files dialog box appears MAXPRO MS R310 Enterprise I Edition Start Copying Files R tings befo Total Approximate Time to Install Pre Requisites 2 mins Total Approximate Time to Install MAXPRO VMS Products 38 mins Install sit Figure 3 12 Start Copying Files 9 If you want to review or change any settings click Back Note The Start Copying Files dialog box displays the total approximate time for installing the prerequisites and total approximate time for installing the MAXPRO VMS R310 components Please note that prerequisites take more time for installation than the MAXPRO VMS R310 components 10 Click Next The following message appears Setup has detected that listed Pre Requisites are not installed in your system Click Yes to proceed and the Pre Requisites will be automatically installed or Click No to install Ehe Pre Requisites manually Figure 3 13 Confirmation Message to install Prerequisites 11 Click Yes to install the prerequisites automatically else click No Note From step 12 onwards till the end of the installation the prerequisi
79. from a site or do not want the display of a live video from a site All the associations made to the video input are removed when you delete it Before you begin MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 161 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Ov e Disassociate Partitions See Associating Partitions to Video Inputs for more information e Disassociate Events See Associating Events for more information To delete a video input 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Devices in the navigation area and then click Video Inputs The Video Inputs screen appears in the display area 3 Select the check box corresponding to the video input that you want to delete 4 Click Delete A confirmation message appears on top of the display area 5 Click Yes ADDING A VIDEO INPUT DEVICE 1 Inthe Video Input Details area specify the following video input device details 2 Repeat the step 2 through step 5 of section Adding a Camera on page 119 3 Click Save ADDING A VIDEO INPUT DEvicE DIGITAL INPUT TRUNK 1 Inthe Video Input Details area specify the following video input device details Field Description Video Input Name Type a video input device name The video input device name appears in the devices window making it easy to select Description Type a description for the camera Callup Number A unique number that identifies the camera By default the next available number is allocated The
80. from the Left e to from the Bottom e to from the Top e Direction Note Direction is with respect to the field of view not the ROI which may have an irregular shape MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs 4 Configure the settings to define what should happen when an object satisfies the condition The following table lists the settings and their description Settings Generate an alarm Description Sends an alarm to the EBI Experion or HSS server at the specified Alarm level when an object satisfies the condition Note The alarm is not latched to a point Alarm level The level of the alarms that are generated e Urgent e High Low e Journal the default alarms except for Journal appear in Station s Alarm Summary Journal alarms does not appear in the Station Alarm Summary but are written to the event file and appear in the Event Summary Ensure that all operators who are required to view these alarms have access to the EBI Experion or HSS system area in which the alarms are being raised Start a recording Selecting this allows you to specify Pre record for Record for Record frame rate and Archive after and Delete after properties for video clips created when an object satisfies the condition Pre record for The duration of video that the IP engine keeps in memory for mot
81. hardware requirements how to connect the monitors to the computers how to configure the display properties and how to install the serial expander INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE IN THE SERVER AND CLIENT COMPUTERS Installing the software involves MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 13 COMMISSIONING PLAN ee Steps in the Commissioning Process Ensuring that the server and client computers meet the minimum software requirements such as operating system and anti virus software Installing the MAXPRO VMS R310 software Note See the chapter Installing the MAXPRO VMS R310 Software for information on software requirements and installation instructions for the MAXPRO VMS R310 software CONFIGURING THE MAXPRO VMS SYSTEM In this phase you need to configure the MAXPRO VMS through the user interface Before you start configuring perform the following Determine the number of sites to add in the MAXPRO VMS system A default site is available in MAXPRO VMS Typically a site is a geographical group of cameras or similar cameras and can be used to logically group cameras Determine the number of partitions and event groups to be created for each site A default global partition is automatically created when you add a site in MAXPRO VMS Partitions and event groups are used to limit access to cameras and events Ensure that the recorders and other video devices such as cameras and streamers are powered
82. in a blinking mode in the status bar in red color For example Alarms 10 indicate that there are ten unacknowledged alarms You can select various options using the context menu or shortcut menu by right clicking on the Alarms window The options include e Acknowledge ACK e Clear on ACK e Ack all e Show Video e Show Preview Pane e Show Details e Freeze e Receive Alarms Only e Receive Events Only 312 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide VERIFYING THE CONFIGURATION VMS Checking for Acknowledgement and Clearing of Alarms e Receive both Alarms and Events Acknowledge An acknowledged alarm indicates that the operator has taken the action After acknowledging the alarm it is moved to the acknowledged alarms list in the Alarm window You can also use the Acknowledge button below Alarms window To clear acknowledged alarms use the Clear button below Acknowledged list window Clear on ACK This option clears the alarms which are acknowledged Ack all This option acknowledges all the alarms at once Show Video Select this option if you want to view video from which the alarm was generated Show Preview Pane This option gives you four windows which display alarms which are on pre alarm post alarm and live alarm videos Show Details This option displays the Alarm Details window The Alram Details window displays the details of description of the alarm Device name Date time A
83. in figure 12 CHOOSE THE COLUMNS TO DISPLAY You can choose the attributes of recorder to display in the recorders screen To choose the columns to display 1 Right click on any column header and then point to Choose Columns The available column names are displayed MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 115 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE 2 Select or clear the required column Based on the selection the column table are displayed UPDATING A RECORDER You can update a recorder to change the settings like the recorder name site site address user ID and password To update a recorder 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Devices in the navigation area and then click Recorders The Recorders screen appears in the display area 3 Select the check box corresponding to the recorder you want to update 4 Click Update The settings for the recorder appear You can modify the settings DELETING A RECORDER Before you begin Remove the associations with the video inputs or delete all the video inputs that are associated with the recorder To delete a recorder 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Devices in the navigation area and then click Recorders The Recorders screen appears in the display area 3 Select the check box corresponding to the recorder you want to delete 4 Click Delete A confirmation message appears on top of the display area 5 Click Yes 116 MAXPRO VMS R31
84. in response to every key press Joystick The keyboard beeps in response to any joystickmovement Click Warning The keyboard buzzes in response to warning messages Prompt Alarm The keyboard beeps continuously in response to an alarm message Prompt until the alarm is cleared Deadmap The keyboard beeps if it is not used for specific amount of time as Tone defined by keyboard operator section Note Selecting the Select All check box enables all the options 10 In the Post Event Macro box type the Macro number to be executed after an event 11 In the Post Event Flag area select the check boxes to select the type of events that triggers the post event macro The following table lists the post event flag options Option Description Monitor The post event macro is executed every time a monitor is selected Select Source The post event macro is executed every time a video input device is Select selected Source The post event macro is executed every time a different video input Changed device is selected on the keyboard s current monitor PTZ The post event macro is executed every time the keyboard is used for Control control of a PAN TILT ZOOM camera VCR The post event macro is executed every time the keyboard is used for Control control of a VCR All Keys The post event macro is executed for every key press on the keyboard Note Selecting the Select All check box enables all t
85. in the display area Select the check box corresponding to the user 4 Click Update The general settings for the user appear You can modify the settings DELETING A USER You can remove a user from MAXPRO VMS When you delete a user all the associations made to the user are also removed To delete a user 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand User Management in the navigation area and then click Users The Users screen appears in the display area Select the check box corresponding to the user you want to delete 4 Click Delete A confirmation message appears on top of the display area Click Yes MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 221 A CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Roles ROLES The users in MAXPRO VMS perform various video surveillance operations The surveillance operations can be monitoring the live video recording scenes of interest and so on Some of these operations can be critical while some can be routine ones that are performed every day A user can be responsible for carrying out the routine tasks or critical tasks This responsibility for performing various tasks is provided to the users by means of roles With every role there are a set of predefined privileges that are also assigned to the user While a role can be just a label that is assigned to a user like Operator or Administrator it is the privileges that provide the right and responsibility for carrying out the operati
86. is selected as Camera Type Enterprise Recorder Settings e In the Site ID box type the site ID configured in the Enterprise DVR e In the Station ID box type the station ID configured in the Enterprise DVR Inthe Device Type box type the model of the device Inthe Device ID box type the device ID of the Enterprise DVR Inthe PTZ Sensitivity drop down list select a number for PTZ sensitivity Note The PTZ Sensitivity drop down list is enabled only when you select the PTZ option in the General Settings See Adding a Camera for more information of the camera The numbers represent the speed of the PTZ The higher the number the more the PTZ speed Control Settings e Configure the Control Settings See Control Settings for more information Note The Control Settings tab appears only when PTZ is selected as Camera Type Note The source information is automatically updated when the Discover Cameras feature is used HRXD e In the Control Settings tab configure the Control Settings See Control Settings for more information Note The Control Settings tab appears only when PTZ is selected as Camera Type 122 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs Recorder Type Intellex Instructions Recorder Settings Inthe Resolution drop down list select the required resolution Inthe Vide
87. is enabled and displays the configured switcher 6 Select the required switcher The Device Settings for the switcher appear 7 For detailed procedures about associating the switcher to the camera see Associating a Switcher to a Video Input Note You should have a camera physically connected to the input channel in the Vicon Switcher In this case the camera must be physically connected to the channel 1 ADDING A ANALOG MONITOR To add an analog monitor 1 2 Click the Configurator tab Expand Devices in the navigation area and then click Monitors The Monitors screen appears in the display area Click Add A Monitor screen appears In the Select Monitor Type select Analog Monitor In the Monitor Name box type a name for the monitor Note The camera number and the monitor number must be same For example if you want the video output of camera number 1 then the monitor number must be 1 Under the Device Settings in the Select Switcher drop down list select the required switcher For detailed procedures about associating the switcher to the camera see Adding Monitors Click Save ASSOCIATING A J OYSTICK CONTROLLER To associate a joystick controller MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 183 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Devices in the navigation area and then click Joystick Controllers The Joystick Controllers screen ap
88. is the process of installing configuring and setting up MAXPRO VMS hardware and software At the end of the commissioning process the MAXPRO VMS system is equipped for use by operators to perform surveillance operations The steps in the commissioning process must be performed one after the other for successful deployment of MAXPRO VMS system STEPS IN THE COMMISSIONING PROCESS 6060609000606099209096906060606060000000909829820990990690606000000009822990909099000000009999999990999 The process of commissioning consists of the following phases Setting up the Server and Client Computers Installing the MAXPRO VMS R310 Software in the Server and Client Computers Configuring the MAXPRO VMS System Verifying the Configuration SETTING UP THE SERVER AND CLIENT COMPUTERS Setting up the server and client computers involve Determining the number of server and client computers at the location and ensuring that they meet the minimum hardware requirements such as processor type and memory size e the computers after ensuring that they meet the hardware requirements You can connect up to four monitors to each computer After configure the monitor display properties e nstalling the serial expander if switchers serial keyboards Ultrakey Protocol Interface Translators PIT and other serial devices are used at the location Note See the chapter Setting up the Client and the Server Computers for information on
89. on and connected to the network Determine the IP addresses of the recorders and streamers The IP addresses are required to add the devices to the MAXPRO VMS system Determine to which site each recorder camera monitor and switcher needs to be associated Determine to which event group and partition each recorder camera switcher and monitor needs to be associated Determine the roles of users for each site You need to create roles and define privileges for them while configuring the MAXPRO VMS system Determine the number of users for each site You need to create users and associate them to roles while configuring the MAXPRO VMS system MAXPRO can also use Windows System users discoverable through Active directory Determine which partitions event groups client workstations and joystick controllers Ultrakey keyboard each user can access Note See the chapter Configuring devices and Setting up a Site for information on how to configure the MAXPRO VMS system 14 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide COMMISSIONING PLAN Steps in the Commissioning Process VERIFYING THE CONFIGURATION e Verifying the configuration involves checking whether the surveillance operations can be performed using MAXPRO VMS software Surveillance operations include viewing the live video performing the pan tilt and zoom on the video and starting the video recording Note See the chapter Verifying the Confi
90. options available for this option are Every I frame and Every second I frame and so on When you select this option the frame rate given to the VMD algorithm is displayed Note This setting has a high impact on the loading of the server the higher the frame rate the higher the load on the CPU and impacts the bandwidth used by the streamer when motion detection is activated Optimize for movement Applicable to the selected region of interest Select the option you want to optimize the algorithm to detect the movement of any object The options are nany direction the default e Across field of view To from camera Sensitivity Applicable to the selected region of interest Indicates how sensitive the algorithm must be to detect movement Values are between 1 and 100 and the higher the value the more sensitive to motion The default is 40 Note If the viewing resolution is changed it affects this value MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 133 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE PREMIUM HIGH CPU ALGORITHM The following table list the Premium High CPU algorithm tuning properties Settings Description Detection frame rate The detection frame rate description for Premium High CPU Algorithm is same as Standard Low CPU algorithm Refer page 132 Sensitivity Specify whether the camera is aimed at an Indoors High or Outdoors Low s
91. output Update Video Output To allow user to update video output Delete Video Output To allow user to delete video output Add Sequence To allow user to add sequence Update Sequence To allow user to update sequence Delete Sequence To allow user to delete sequence Add Port To allow user to add a port Update Port To allow user to update a port Delete Port To allow user to delete a port Add Partition To allow user to add a partition Update Partition To allow user to update a partition Delete Partition To allow user to delete a partition MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Roles Privileges Description Add Site To allow user to add a site Update Site To allow user to update a site Delete Site To allow user to delete a site Add Workstation To allow user to add a workstation Update Workstation To allow user to update a workstation Delete Workstation To allow user to delete a workstation Add Event Group To allow user to add event group Update Event Group To allow user to update event group Delete Event Group To allow user to delete event group Add Intercept To allow user to add intercept keys Update Intercept To allow user to update joystick controller Delete Intercept To allow user to delete intercept Add Role To allow user to add role Update Role To allow user to update
92. page 311 Acknowledgement of alarms and clearing of alarms page 312 Image creation page 314 Clip creation page 315 Sending and receiving operator messages page 316 Video from the surrounding cameras video pursuit or surrounding page 317 cameras feature in MAXPRO VMS Saving the salvo layout using the salvo view feature page 318 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 301 VERIFYING THE CONFIGURATION OF MAXPRO VMS Task See Device listing in My Devices window page 319 Searching recorded video page 320 Generating and viewing the event and operator log report page 321 302 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide VERIFYING THE CONFIGURATION MAXPRO VMS Checking the Connection with MAXPRO VMS server CHECKING THE CONNECTION WITH MAXPRO VMS SERVER Ce ee The VMS can consist of or more servers You can save the address of each server in profiles from the Log On dialog box that appears when you start MAXPRO VMS The Log On dialog box is illustrated in the following figure Logon English US English Username Figure 5 1 VMS Log To connect to a MAXPRO VMS R310 server from the client computer 1 Click the language selection option and then select the required language from the drop down list
93. performed on the current video input device on the network Switcher Settings Advance e Configure the Switcher Settings and Advance Settings and PTZ control Settings See Associating a Switcher to a Video Settings Input for more information e Configure the PTZ Control Settings See Control Settings for more information To preview video when camera is associated to a recorder e Select the Preview check box to view live video from the camera Clickthe icon to save the current image in the clip video directory 120 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs e Clickthe amp icon to open any saved image in the preview screen and position the camera accordingly e Click the T icon to delete the image in the preview screen Note Using the preview option a user can take snapshots of the area to be monitored by the surveillance camera and save them These snapshots can be used to identify the proper location where the camera needs to be installed so that the desired field of view is obtained This can also be used to reposition the camera and identify changes in camera field of view ASSOCIATING RECORDER TO A VIDEO INPUT DEVICE Video input devices like cameras and digital input trunk can be associated with different recorders Video clips are recorded and stored in recorders To associate a camera to a recorder 1 In the Conn
94. proceed to step 7 The Choose TrinityDatabase location dialog box appears 6 Select Connect using option as Windows authentication or SQL Server authentication using Login ID and password below as per the requirement and then click Next You are prompted to install SQL Server 2012 Express Note See SQL Express 2012 Scenarios for various SQL 2012 Scenarios If you enter an invalid Login ID and Password to connect SQL Server then see Manual Steps if SQL Connection Fails MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 51 52 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Custom Installation 7 Click Yes The Choose TrinityDatabase location dialog box appears MAXPRO MS R310 Enterprise Edition Choose TrinityDatabase location Install Figure 3 17 Choose TrinityDatabase location Note Click Browse to change the default destination folder and then select the folder where the Trinity database server must be installed It is best practice to Install the Database on a seperate Mirrored hard drive This ensures the database is still available if the OS drive is failed or get corrupted 8 Click Next The Choose Cache file location dialog box appears MAXPRO YMS R310 Enterprise Edition Choose Cache file location Enter Trinity Controller cache file directory path C Program Files x86 Honeywell TrinityFramework CacheFiles Install Figure 3 18 Choose Cache file location MAXPRO VMS R310 Co
95. represents the old VideoBlox matrix switcher hardware 6 Specify the COM Port Settings The following table lists the COM port settings Field Description Baud Rate The rate at which data is transferred through the port By default a baud rate of 19 2K is available for the port To change the baud rate select the desired baud rate from the drop down list Stay Alive Indicates if the MAXPRO NET Server is functioning When you enable this check box an ACK character is transmitted from the port every 2 seconds By default the function is disabled Select Enabled or Disabled setting from the drop down list 270 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP SITE Serial Port Field Description Xon Xoff If this option is enabled Xon and Xoff characters are transmitted to resume and stop the data flow Software handshaking Xon Xoff is enabled by default To change the setting select the desired setting from the drop down list Data Bit The number of data bits per character can be selected as 7 or 8 The default value is 7 To change the data bits setting select the desired setting from the drop down list Stop Bit The number of stop bits per character can be selected as 1 or 2 The default value is 1 Parity The type of parity to be used by the port can be selected as Even Odd or None The Default is even parity To change the parity s
96. the event you want to add the Event Group 2 Double click on the Event Group box The Select Event Groups dialog box appears 3 Click the check box corresponding to the Event Group you want to add 4 Click OK Note You need to add an event group before you associates it to an event See Adding an Event Group for more information To disable an event 1 Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to disable 2 Click on the Disabled box A drop down list is enabled 3 Select True to disable the event To assign severity level 282 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE i Scheduler 1 Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to assign the severity level 2 Double click on the Severity Level box and edit the severity level Note Severity level is set to trigger alarms when the threshold is met For example if the threshold is set 50 in the preferences tab an alarm is triggered when threshold becomes 51 To enter remarks 1 Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to enter remarks 2 Click the Remarks box and type the remarks To assign macros 1 Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to assign macros 2 Click the Start Procedure box and then type the required macro 3 Click the End Procedure box and then type the required macro ASSOCIATING EVENT ATTRIBUTES Before you begin Ass
97. the joystick controllers are associated when a user is added You can remove the joystick that you do not require To disassociate Joystick Controller from a video output e Select the check box corresponding to the joystick name and then click Remove 174 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Joystick Controllers OYSTICK CONTROLLERS An Ultrakey keyboard is referred to as the joystick controller Using the Ultra key keyboard you can perform actions such as selecting a panel PTZ operations selecting a video source such as a camera and others in the Viewer tab You can program the keys in the Ultrakey keyboard to perform a particular action by associating intercept commands to them For example a key can be programmed to select a panel in the salvo layout By default 99 keyboards and a server keyboard is added Only joystick controller 1 is enabled by default The server keyboard cannot be deleted J OYSTICK CONTROLLERS AND USERS Users are responsible for carrying out video surveillance operations in MAXPRO VMS Joystick controllers are associated to users Users associated to joystick controllers can carry out video surveillance tasks in the client workstations J OYSTICK CONTROLLERS AND INTERCEPT KEYS Joystick controllers Ultrakey keyboards are associated to intercept keys You can program the keys in the Ultrakey keyboard to perform an action by associating
98. to original position MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 129 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE OO Note The Presets section lists the number of presets and the tour name If you select VCL Orbiter Gold or VCL Orbiter Lite in the Camera control type option then the VCL options appear Set the VCL options according to your requirement The following table lists the VCL options and the instructions to set them Settings Description Flip camera when tilt angle is at Select the check box to flip camera when tilt 90 degrees angle is 90 degrees Allow Digital Zoom Select the check box to allow digital zoom for the camera Enable infrared sensitive mode Select the check box to enable infrared sensitive in low light mode for the camera when there is low light 1 Inthe VCL Tours section select the required tour from the Tours list 2 Click New button to create new tours MOTION DETECTION SETTINGS VIDEO MOTION Configuring motion detection involves defining one or more Region of Interest ROI in the field of view Rectangles or polygons are drawn in the field of view to specify the regions of interest and then the motion detection algorithm is tuned within those regions Some of the considerations while configuring motion detection are e streamer supports streamer based motion detection use it to reduce the load on the computer Motion detection recordi
99. to check the availability of the host name In the User ID box type the user name to access the recorder In the Password box type the password to access the recorder Select the Time Zone check box to enable the global time zone box and select the required time zone Note See VMS as a Recorder for more information about MAXPRO VMS recorder HRDP In the Site Address box type the numeric IP address or the host name of the HRDP recorder Not supported Check for duplicate IP address device name in the database check box to check the availability of the host name In the Site Port box the port number appears by default In the User ID box type the user name to access the recorder In the Password box type the password to access the recorder In the Device Type drop down list select the device type as applicable Select the Time Zone check box to enable the global time zone box and then select the time zone from the drop down list 7 Inthe Recorder Version drop down list select the recorder version 8 In the Site drop down list select the site to which the recorder is to be associated 9 Associate Partition See Discovering Devices for more information 10 Associate Events and Event Attributes See Associating Events and Event Attributes to a Recorder for more information 11 Click Save 12 Click Discover Devices to discover various devices that are connected to MAXPRO VMS See Discovering
100. to have stopped This property affects When motion is detected properties as follows e A new alarm is not generated before this time has expired e new recording does not start before this time has expired If you set the Record for property to until motion finishes recording continues until this time has expired e Video is not resent to a Station until this time has expired e If you have a lot of false detections occurring increasing this value helps e If your motion detection recordings are configured to stop when the motion stops and does not stop as anticipated decreasing this value might help Generate an alarm When checked sends an alarm to the EBI Experion or HSS server at the specified Alarm level when motion is detected Note The alarm is not latched to a point Alarm level The alarm level can be of type e Urgent High Low e Journal the default alarms except Journal appear in Station s Alarm Summary Journal alarms do not appear in the Station Alarm Summary but are written to the event file and appear in the Event Summary Ensure that all operators who are required to view these alarms have access to the EBI Experion or HSS system area in which the alarms are being raised This area is the same as the camera s configured area Start a recording Starts a recording when motion is detected Selecting this allows you to specify Pre record for Reco
101. to your requirement to select text line settings The following table lists the options Option Message Line Description Defines the line where the Message Line text Example Warning message is displayed Mode Line Defines the line where the Mode text Example Scan mode is displayed Source Description Defines the line the Video Input device description is displayed Channel Description Defines the line where the description for the video device is displayed Real Time Clock Defines the line the Real Time Clock is displayed Note Selecting the Select All check box selects all the Text Line Settings 9 Inthe Text Display Settings area select the check boxes to select the text display settings The following table lists the options Option Description Enhanced Card To enhance the appearance of the text display Hidden Text To hide the text display on the monitor Shadow To apply shadow affect for the text display BackGround To apply background affect for the text display Reverse To reverse black white affect for the text display Black White Double Height To increase the height of text display on monitor Flash To display blinking text on the monitor Note Selecting the Select All check box enables all the Text Display Settings 10 In the X and Y boxes type a location for the text to appear on the monitor Valid positions a
102. user initiates the recording in viewer tab the IP Engine inserts this pre record segment at the start of the recording Configuring a pre record period on the recording allows you to view what was happening before the recording started For example if you set this to 10 seconds the recording shows the 10 seconds of video before the recording is activated Record for Duration for which the recording is done after the user action Record frame rate Frame rate at which the video is recorded for user activated recordings Archive after Period for which user activated recordings are available for playback before they are automatically archived To ensure that the clips are not deleted before archival set the period lesser than the period in Delete after The period starts when the recording of the video clip ends Delete after The video clips stored for this period before being automatically deleted The period starts when the recording of the video clip ends Configure the settings in the Background Recording area The following table lists the settings in the Background Recording area Settings Description Start background To start the background continuous recording recording Clip duration The duration of the video clips The video captured during background recording is broken into numerous clips of the specified duration Ensure that the duration result in clips of manageable size
103. various reasons for example network problem then the install wizard displays the following message Unable ta connect to the specified SOL instance Please check the Machine SQL Instance Login Credentials Network A Connectivity Click YES to continue even if Connection Fails but Database will not be created If you click Yes and complete the installation then you must perform the following manual steps to work with the application 1 Update the config files with SQL server and windows SQL authentication connection details See To update the config files e Trinity SystemServices exe config e Trinity ServiceHost Scheduler exe config 2 Add the registry entries See To add the registry entries 3 Execute the create trinity db R310 bat file TO UPDATE THE CONFIG FILES 1 Browse INSTALL PATH WMoneywellVTrinityFrameworkWBinVTrinity SystemServices e xe config and then double click the Trinity SystemServices exe config file Note lt lt INSTALL_PATH gt gt should be substituted with the actual path selected during installation 2 ForSQL Authentication a In the User ID field type the user ID The default user name is sa b In the Password field type the password The default user name is Passwordl c In the Data Source field type SQLEXPRESS 3 For Windows authentication In the Server field type SQLExpress 4 Similarly browse lt lt INSTALL_P
104. what do you want to do section See step 7 Override device name if it already exists Select the option to override the device name that already exits Use Enterprise System Number as Callup Number Select the option to use the same callup number of Enterprise When this option is selected choose the options from If Callup number already exists what do you want to do section and Camera Type Selection See step 7 and step 6 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP SITE Recorders Settings Instruction Use Child VMS Callup Number Note This feature is applicable only for as Callup Number MAXPRO VMS recorder Select the option to use the same callup number of the cameras configured in the child VMS When this option is selected choose the options from If Callup number already exists what do you want to do section See step 7 7 In If Callup number already exists what do you want to do selection select the required option The available options are e Add to End appends to the end of existing call up number e Override overrides the callup number e Don t Add does not add the callup number 8 In Camera Type Selection section select Add Camera as Digital Camera or Add Camera as Hybrid Camera 9 Click View Discover Log to view any log 10 Click Close once connection established status appears in Discovery Status se
105. 0 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs VIDEO INPUTS Video inputs are devices through which video is supplied into MAXPRO VMS Video input devices can be logically grouped in MAXPRO VMS so that selecting and updating them is easier The following types of video input devices are supported e Camera fixed or PTZ e Standard Device other devices freeze frames and so on e Smart Device devices such as multiplexers e Trunk trunk video input from a networked system e Video Cassette Recorder dedicated or Dub VCR e Standby VCR Standby VCR as used in VCR Management e Logging VCR Monitor logging VCR as used in VCR Management e Menu MAXPRO Net system menu using MaxMon e Black Source black source for monitor blanking e Digital Input Trunk to view analog camera video VIDEO INPUTS AND PARTITIONS A partition is a logical grouping of video devices Partitions are associated to cameras You can restrict a non associated user of the partition from viewing or changing the settings of the camera VIDEO INPUTS AND EVENTS Events are predefined actions Video inputs have events set by default For example when a camera connection is lost an event CameraDisconnected is generated You can also associate event attributes to events An alarm is triggered whenever an event is generated VIDEO INPUTS AND ANALYTICS Analytics can be configured for
106. 310 2 0 0 eh 71 SQL EXPRESS 2012 SCENARIOS 72 CLEANING THE SYSTEM 2 05 2 sag Sods ska sds aha ds wd a dos Ba 73 MANUAL STEPS IF SQL CONNECTION FAILS 0 0 000 cece eect tenes 75 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING A SITE 77 BEFORE YOU BEGIN erea estt ee UE RERO cS ees 77 FIREWALL SETTINGS axis ace d es Ae ode ROREM CX E Ye Uo ace wk ORS 77 SERVER SIDE CONFIGURATION ee arr rs 77 euo dibud A 78 OTHER RECORDER pb ce urbe urbe usu RR Se 78 CLIENT CONFIGURATION seeee ehh hh 79 ULTRAKEY ee uem arre S SR RC Suh SC UAE ERR EROR eR c Ro Race 79 CONFIGURING MAXPRO VMS eux p GE x Pug auda acies 80 SETTING UP A SITE USING CONFIGURATOR 82 ADDING SITES PIDE 82 ADDING WORKSTATIONS peers CERT ead Sd ada ds ada ds Wiad Ss Rib dt 82 ADDING PARTITIONS dro bee ona bees dae ees 82 ADDING ROLES AND USERS 0 0000 hh hh 82 ADDING CONTACT GROUP AND CONTACTS 000 0c cece eee ene eens 82 ADDING EVENT GROUPS eir aud ew ten ot 82 ADDING RECORDER GROUPS 0 0 cece hh 83 ADDING SERIAL PORTS 4 Rod ead Bids sae by Dede Gib Gd H
107. 69 Event Association Select Recorder or Video Input under Event Type Filter From the Device Types drop down list select the required device Based on the device selected the following information appears e list of events associated to a device are listed in the Events table e The number of devices corresponding to the selected device are listed under Devices From the Site drop down list select a site 6 In the Events table select the check box for the events you want to associate to the device To associate all the events to a device select the top level check box located in the header section of the Events table 7 complete the device event association perform the following e associate one device at a time with the selected events under Devices select a camera and then click gt The selected camera appears under Associated Devices 274 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Event Association e Click BS to associate all the devices to the selected events All the devices appear under Associated Devices e To remove a device under Associated List select a check box corresponding to the device and then click ES The selected device appears under Devices Click to disassociate all the devices to Devices 8 Click Save to save the information MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 275 276 CONFIGURING
108. ATH gt gt Honeywell TrinityFramework Bin Trinity ServiceHost Sche duler exe config and then double click the Trinity ServiceHost Scheduler exe config file 5 Repeat the steps 2 and 3 to update the config file with SQL Authentication and Windows authentication MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 75 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE e TO ADD THE REGISTRY ENTRIES 1 Access the registry HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Wow6432Node Honeywell TrinityFra mework 2 Update the registry value names with the SQL instance details which you are planning to use Registry value Name Value TRINITYDATABASEPAT c Program Files Microsoft SQL H Server MSSQL11 SQLEXPRESS64BIT MSSQL DA TA Note TRINITY DATABASEPATH should be replaced with the path fetched from the registry apart from the selected SQL instance name s DATA path where mdf and Idf files will be stored TRINITYDBSERVER admin PCVMS SQLEXPRESS64BIT 3 Similarly access the registry HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Wow6432Node Honeywell TrinityFra meworkWDatabaseDetails 4 Update the registry value names with the SQL instance details which you are planning to use Registry value Name Value admin PCVMS Persist Security Info False User ID sa Password Password 1 Initial Catalog TrinityDatabase Data Source admin PCVMS SQLEXPRESS64BIT DATABASEPATH c Prog
109. AXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 113 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE f Click Filter The recorder columns based on your requirement is displayed For example If you define a row value as value Starts with MAXPRO NVR And that Is not equal to Enterprise then the result of the filter is displayed as shown below Figure 4 14 Defining Filter To Clear or Reset the filter Click Clear Filter in the dialog box Or Click Reset Filter to reset all the filters SORTING RECORDER Sorting feature enables you to sort the required columns ascending or descending It also allows you to group or ungroup based on the specific column To sort the columns ascending or descending 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Devices in the navigation area 3 Click the Recorders branch The Recorders screen appears in the display area 114 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders Recorders x Racca idars Deag chara header t hant to gu by aue Aem 199810722 Figure 4 15 Recorder Screen Right click on the required column name 4 MAXPf VM Sorting options are displayed as shown below Fetal Court LI 1 Pages 1000 5 Choose the required Ascending or Descending option The columns information is arranged accordingly as shown
110. Axis 240Q e In the Video Channel Number box type cameras the input number for the streamer The valid input number range between 1 to 6 e In the Resolution drop down list select the resolution The selection of the resolution depends on the input number provided in the Video Channel Number box The resolution that should be set in the Resolution box based on the input number provided is as follows e lto4 VCam e 5 Panorama e 6 FishEye VCam FishEye Note Selecting high resolution for all the streamers might disturb streaming HCX In the Resolution drop down list selecting a cropped resolution would not display a full field view 148 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs ASSOCIATING EVENTS AND EVENT ATTRIBUTES TO A VIDEO INPUT You can associate one or more events to a video input An alarm is triggered whenever any of the associated event occurs for the video input For certain events you can also associate event attributes For example for an Encoder Disabled event you can associate attributes such as Encoder Name Encoder ID and so on For every attribute that you associate you can set a value based on which the event is triggered In the above example you can associate the attribute Encoder Name to the event and set its value as Encoder A When this event is associated to the video input an alarm is raised when the event Encoder Di
111. CES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs CONFIGURING CAMERAS FOR IP ENGINE The following table lists the special considerations for configuring some of the cameras for IP Engine Streamer Type Fields GrandEye and Axis 240Q Inthe Video Channel Number box cameras type the input number for the streamer The valid input number range between 1 to 6 Inthe Resolution drop down list select the resolution The selection of the resolution depends on the input number provided in the Video Channel Number box The resolution that should be set in the Resolution box based on the input number provided is as follows e to4 VCam e 5 Panorama e 6 FishEye VCam FishEye Note Selecting high resolution for all the streamers might disturb streaming HCX In the Resolution drop down list selecting a cropped resolution would not display a full field view ADVANCE SETTINGS FOR CAMERAS CONNECTED TO THE IP ENGINE The advance settings of IP Engine help you to configure record settings such as frame rate deleting clips and pre recording options You can also set the camera control options such as PTZ settings and configure motion detection You can configure the following settings for a camera that is connected to the IP Engine e Record settings For configuring the user activated and background continuous recording See Configuring Record Settings for the Cameras Connected to the IP Engine for more inform
112. Camera Deiak Ossbied E Cima n Psi Caves Build 65 Rew C 1 Dash Disabled Conn n Salins nd Camera Did 65 Rev C 2 Dd Gres n MOSMIM Peed Cormera Bud 83 Rev C x Odak Omabed Gres n ans 65 Rev D v Camera D PANASONICONOQZ E106 Dota PTE Camera Data 6S Hey D w e Dm w Sond ins Fami Rid 65 Rev E n D e Coreg nus w uo Digtal Camera Bul 6E Mey C x Des a pae doenn DI Posa uxo Doe a 5 L Amy r1619 AM Figure 4 24 Video Inputs s Screen 4 Click Filter dialog box is displayed as shown below Select All x AUDIO E 40010 191 B2 HD4MDIH Rajeev1 B2 HD4MDIH Rajeev1 154 B2 HD4MDIH Rajeev12 418 E B2 HD4MDIH Rajeev12 418 152 B2 HD4MDIHX Rajeev2 416 B2 HD4MDIHX Rajeev2 416 150 B4 HD44IP Shekari B4 HD44IP Shekar1 189 B4 HD44IPX Shekar2 Al CE L nr107 z 4 gt Shaw rows Witt value tha is equal to And isegual to llaa 158 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs 5 Under Select All select the required check boxes to di
113. Completed MAXPRO NYR 3 o 638 Camera User recording error MAXPRO NYR 3 Oo 639 Camera NoMotion Detected MAXPRO NYR 3 Figure 4 19 Select from List 3 Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to associate 4 Click OK To disassociate events to video input e Select the check box corresponding to the event and then click Remove To add Event Groups to events 1 Select the check box corresponding to the event for which you want to add the Event Group 2 Double click the cell under the Event Group column Select EventGroup dialog box appears Click the check box corresponding to the Event Group you want to add 4 Click OK Note You need to add an event group before you associates it to an event See Adding an Event Group for more information To disable an event 1 Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to disable 2 Click the cell under the Disabled column A drop down list is enabled 3 Select True To assign severity level 1 Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to assign the severity level 2 Click the cell under the Severity Level column and edit the severity level Note Severity level is set to trigger alarms when the threshold is met For example if the threshold is set 50 in the preferences tab an alarm is triggered when threshold becomes 51 To enter remarks 150 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFI
114. D SETTING UP A SITE Creating an Email Template 11 In the Disclaimer Text box the default disclaimer text displays You can type a new disclaimer text as per your requirement 12 Click Preview if you want to preview the e mail Note Click Reset if you want to reset the email template 13 Click Save MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 293 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE TE creating an Email Template 294 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide VERIFYING THE CONFIGURATION MAXPR OVERVIEW Verifying the configuration of the MAXPRO VMS is the final phase in the commissioning process In this phase you need to verify the working of the MAXPRO VMS BEFORE YOU BEGIN Ensure that the configuration of the MAXPRO VMS is complete ACTIVITIES TO PERFORM IN THIS PHASE In this phase using the MAXPRO VMS user interface perform the tasks listed in the following table to verify the configuration in VMS Server Task See Connection with the MAXPRO VMS server logging on page 303 Device listing in the Devices window page 304 Live video display from cameras page 306 Playback of recorded video page 307 Inserting comments and marking the point of interest using the page 309 bookmark feature in Timeline window Playback of loop mark in and mark out feature in Timeline window page 310 Panning tilting and zooming functions analog PTZ and Digital PTZ
115. DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Migration MIGRATION MAXPRO VMS supports data migration of mpn and max files from legacy applications like MaxproNet Enterprise NVR configuration data can be migrated into MAXPRO VMS using the HLI file You can also export the MAXPRO VMS configuration whenever required From MAXPRO VMS R200 onwards you can export or import the configuration file of the previous versions of the MAXPRO VMS EXPORTING THE FILES To export the database 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Migrations in the navigation area and then click Export The Export screen appears in the display area Alam s 12971 74401 aM Figure 4 70 Exporting Database 3 In the Export Path box click the ellipses button to select a path Or If you want to export the files to a network location click the ellipses button specify the path and then click Load 4 Click Export IMPORTING THE DATABASE To import the database 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Migrations in the navigation area and then click Import The Import screen appears in the display area MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP SITE Equip Series Camera path Alarms 12974 Figure 4 71 Importing Database 3 From the Source Type drop down list select the required database type 4 Inthe Import Path box click the ellipses button to select the locati
116. Desergnen a Fs eto IH tvert croup keys leges Sytem Macros RD Server Recorder Gow aa Sarid Pots is Association Device Setti ts Enter Ragid ye details unt address 159910722 Chad for dupeate address device nana n database User Defined Everts Se Port 10000 Syers Penser Video Format ese re J SMTP Server Setting Op Bort Adminstrator Motor 1 o o 15 13 AM Figure 4 3 Recorder General Settings 4 Inthe Device Name box type a name for the recorder Maximum characters that you can type is 50 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 85 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE 5 Inthe Description box type a description for the recorder 6 Inthe Recorder Type drop down list select the recorder Device settings for the selected recorder appear The following table explains how to configure the device settings for the recorders Recorder Type To configure the device settings RapidEye Inthe Unit Address box type the numeric IP address or the host name of RapidEye recorder Click Ping to verify the connection The field appears in green if the IP address or the host name is valid Select the Check for duplicate IP address device name in the database check box to check the availability of the host name Inthe Site Port box the port number appears by default
117. Devices for more information ADDING RECORDER IN BULK Using Add Bulk feature you can add number of recorder at once To add the recorder in bulk 1 Inthe Recorder screen select the required recorder check box MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders MACRO NMR 10287347 20 MORON 10787214 22 MAXPRO MR 15999487129 20 20 mede 0 70 3 the number of recorder to add in Recorders to Add box and then click OK The number of new recorders added is highlighted in the recorder screen as shown below a Recorders x LA ipae Denm mor ders Deng eae t hara to group by ce 1 MAXPRO VMS 3 159 93 195 04 MAURO VMS 153 99 187 148 P310 J 18038187203 500 Honey MVR G MIONA 30 MAXPSO NVR 11 302822452 10787246 20 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 91 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE VMS AS A RECORDER This feature is also called VMS in VMS You can configure MAXPRO VMS as recorder similar to any other recorder like Fusion Enterprise and so on This configuration is useful if there are more than 10000 MAXPRO VMS s configured in different locations and you want to control them from one master MAXPRO VMS For example there are 3 sites A B and C having MAXPRO VMS1 MAXPRO V
118. Edition alidation of User Credentials Domain Name Host Name WIN2K8 64BIT1 d User Name f Enable M restart Installshield Figure 3 5 Validation of User Credentials MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide INSTALLING THE VMS R310 SOFTWARE How to Install MAXPRO VMS Note The user credentials of the Windows user that was used to log onto the machine 9 Inthe Domain Name Host Name list type the domain name if you know it or select one from the list If you are not installing on a domain choose the local computer name 10 In the User Name box type your Windows user name Provide the admin credentials only 11 In the Password box type your Windows password Provide the admin credentials only Note Ensure that you provide and install with Admin credentials only 12 Select the Enable Auto Logon check box if you want the computer to reboot on its own whenever required during the installation process Note You are prompted to reboot multiple times while installing MAXPRO VMS R310 auto log on avoids manual intervention during multiple reboots 13 Click Next The Installation Type dialog box appears MAXPRO YMS R310 Enterprise Edition Installation Type Custom Installation stalled and Installed Figure 3 6 Installation Type 14 Select Custom Installation or Complete Installation as applicable Use the instructions in one of the following sections t
119. GURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs 1 Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to enter remarks 2 Click the cell under the Remarks column and type the remarks To assign macros 1 Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to assign macros 2 Click the cell under the Start Procedure column and then type the required macro 3 Click the cell under the End Procedure column and then type the required macro ASSOCIATING EVENT ATTRIBUTES Before you begin Associate events To associate event attributes 1 Select the check box corresponding to the event for which you want to associate event attributes The Event attributes Settings appear in the lower pane 2 Click Associate The Select Available Event Attributes dialog box appears 3 Select the check box corresponding to the event attributes that you want to associate 4 Click OK To disassociate event attributes from a video input e Select the check box corresponding to the event attribute and then click Remove The following tables describes the event name event attributes and their description Recorder to Event Name Event Attribute which camera Attributes Description is connected IP Engine CameraVideoLoss StreamerVideoInp Numeric values Ok utNumber from 1 to maximum channels supported by streamer CameraVideoLoss StreamerVideoInp Numeric values Alarm utNumber from 1 to maximum channels s
120. Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Outputs ADDING A VIDEO OuTPUT DEVICE STANDARD DEVICE SMART DEvICE VCR STANDBY VCR 1 2 3 In the VideoOutput Name box type the name for the monitor In the Description box type a description for the monitor In the Callup Number box an automatic number is allocated by default The operator uses this number to select a monitor from the keyboard In the Site box select the location in which the monitor is used Select the Lock VideoOutput check box to lock monitor from displaying video In the Switcher Settings type the Slot number to identify the slot location of the video output channel In the Text Inserter Subrack Settings area click Switcher if the monitor is connected to a switcher and then select the required switcher in the Switcher drop down list Specify the following details Settings Description Text Inserter Address of the subrack that contains the text insertion card is SubrackID displayed by default The valid range of subrack addresses is 1 799 a value of 0 indicates the text is not used Text Inserter Type the slot number within the subrack where the text insertion Slot box card resides Note The valid range of slot numbers is 1 32 HD Series hardware supports the MX208 8 channel video output text insertion card the text inserter slot entries correspond with the physical video output channel of the subrack For VideoBlo
121. Honeywell MAXPRO Video Management System R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide Document 800 20433 A 02 2015 This page is intentionally left blank Revisions Issue Date Description 1 0 March 8 2012 New document 2 0 February 2015 Updated for R310 Release This page is intentionally left blank MAXPRO VMS R310 Table of Contents Table of Contents ABOUT THIS GUIDE 665 606 6462456600564 dl INTRODUCING MAXPRO VMS R310 lssleeeeee 11 SCOPE 11 INTENDED AUDIENCE 0 ra ls 11 STRUCTURE OF THIS GUIDE 2 2 4 2 cece cee eee eee eee 12 TYPOGRAPHICAL CONVENTIONS Rs 12 OVERVIEW desc eios bees oa Ge Baga a bac s orar ER dp Parca a cp rear eee 13 STEPS IN THE COMMISSIONING PROCESS 13 SETTING UP THE SERVER AND CLIENT 13 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE IN THE SERVER AND CLIENT COMPUTERS 13 CONFIGURING THE MAXPRO VMS SYSTEM lesse 14 VERIFYING THE CONFIGURATION sss 15 OVERVIEW merset au ascends da ERA ES doe ha ae aca e Sans DE dows epp 17 BEFORE YOU BEGIN oeie os ace redde uec Ec ICE e lec ne une et tef Died arid be nda uda 17 TASKS TO PERFORM IN THIS PHASE 0 0 cece cece e res 17 VIRTUAL MACHINE SPECIFICATIONS
122. I 146GB for Windows operating system MAXPRO VMS Server Software and Microsoft SQL Server software Disk RAID set 2 utilizes 10 RPM SATA 150GB or 10K 15K RPM SCSI 146GB for MAXPRO VMS database files and Microsoft SQL Server database files Note If fault tolerance is required RAID set 1 is RAID 1 10 or 0 1 and RAID set 2 is RAID 10 or 0 1 Multiple Monitor Card Display Adapter Video Resolution Display Adapter with Video resolution 1024x768 pixels 32 bit color or higher Serial Ports Only required if serial device are to be connected Suggested 8 Port MOXA PCI e serial RS232 Network Connection 1Gbit sec or greater 22 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide SETTING UP THE CLIENT AND THE SERVER COMPUTERS Hardware Specifications Table 2 4 MAXPRO VMS Workstation Computer Standard Spec with Windows 8 1 Professional 32 Bit and 64 bit Windows 7 64 bit and 32 bit Supports up to 2 monitors Specification Processor Description Intel Core 17 4770K 3 5 GHz Recommended Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 or 8 2 32 amp 64 bit Recommended Computer Type Server or Workstation Workstation Recommended System Memory RAM 8GB DYD Drive RW Read Write is required if workstation is used for exporting recordings DVD RW Disk 250GB 7200RPM SATA3 Multiple Monitor Card Display Adapter Video Resolution
123. ITY CONTROLLER 4 222 rt C EUR Ree d HOP DR teens 262 SERIAL PORT RACE X dee ahh ae aaepe dodo a RA pedo 268 ADDING A SERIAL PORT 4 teh css d a koe hd ee te a D 268 UPDATING A SERIAL PORT ru mee da Geb ida ela bd ER RC det cg 271 DELETING A SERIAL PORT lesse ha 271 USER DEFINED EVENTS 4456644054 272 EVENT ASSOCIATION 442 bau Oed E Dre EH 274 MIGRATION 240046084 hoe ene ROS Abas 276 EXPORTING THE FILES a o e gea bre edere ga ER RU UR ane Gs OR 276 IMPORTING THE DATABASE hr 276 EQUIP SERIES CAMERA oii depu od a EP ind anaes 277 SCHEDULER dE RA PR ERA dd 281 UPDATING A SCHEDULER has 281 lo ap orc 285 ADDING JOBS et a i e d od o d el de a d a vi t ee ed 285 ALARM NOTIECATION ex ao GREEK ON EEG Oder 288 SMTP SERVER SETTINGS iis dua op UE ee or lcg x Repo S ex dp ew a ew te cac 291 CREATING AN EMAIL TEMPLATE Id used ure Rud 202 OVERVIEW esu RES E GU E GU PE Ca RU Y eer 301 BEFORE YOU BEGIN Bh quibue Rep EM pei ve v 301 ACTIVITIES TO PERFORM IN THIS es 301 MAXPRO V
124. If you enter an invalid Login ID and Password to connect SQL Server then see Manual Steps if SQL Connection Fails 4 Click Yes The Choose TrinityDatabase location dialog box appears MAXPRO YMS R310 Enterprise Edition Choose TrinityDatabase location Enter TrinityDatabase directory path c Program Files x86 Microsoft SQL Server MSSQL10_50 SQLEXPRESSIMS InstallShield Figure 3 9 Choose TrinityDatabase Location Note Click Browse to change the default destination folder and then select the folder where the Trinity database server must be installed It is best practice to Install the Database on a seperate Mirrored hard drive This ensures the database is still available if the OS drive is failed or get corrupted 46 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Complete Installation 5 Click Next The Choose Cache file location dialog box appears MAXPRO YMS R310 Enterprise Edition Choose Cache file location Enter Trinity Controller cache file directory path C Program Files x86 Honeywell TrinityFramework CacheFiles Figure 3 10 Choose Cache file location Note Click Browse to change the default destination folder and then select the folder where the cache files must be installed 6 Click Next The Language selection for analytics application dialog box appears MAXPRO MS R310 Enterprise Edition x Language selection
125. Inthe Events Configured for Notification table double click on the required event under Attach Clip as shown below A drop down list is displayed Sep Speer umen ys Sem mee Kil x masno ws x aep S iner group Supt Sanet devon z fieree Contact naso ws s ws Controtpu neath Ganges Contrap State Changed Database Server Accepts Connect Database Server fret Goan 7 Server heath Changed E hes Covers 1 pim Mares 5 Server Al Recorder Dao Mr testes Carbide Sorel Ports 09 0 i Wom t Records x Group C APRO wes server Connected 1 MAXPRO WS 2 Contact Gop 1 o Migration E WS Server Decore MARO WESS MARO WS 5 Contant d Server Connected 9 Contact Group 4 Expert D Server MIXPRO NY WR Y Contant Group 1 PV IP Camera Management Enterprise 233 Enterprise 233 Contact Group Gwr D Recorder Ducernectat Enterprae 253 233 Contact Group 1 Alms 13668 6552P Figure 4 82 Attaching Clip 2 Select True to attach the clip and then click Save 290 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE SMTP Server Settings SMTP SERVER SETTINGS To configure SMTP settings 1 Click the Configur
126. M2 MAXPRO VMS3 configured Here A is considered as the centralized site where the master VMS MAXPRO VMS is configured In this scenario you can configure the MAXPRO VMS 2 and MAXPRO VMS 3 as recorders in a MAXPRO VMS1 and monitor the surveillance operations ADVANCED SETTINGS FOR IP ENGINE You can do the following in the advanced settings for the IP Engine e Configuring the Audit Log e Managing Disk Space for IP Engine e Monitoring the Status of the Camera Server e Viewing the Version and License Information for IP Engine CONFIGURING THE AUDIT The audit log is stored in the IP Engine database The IP Engine uses the audit log to provide a report of all user actions and system events See About Reports You cannot configure the type of system events recorded in the audit logs but you can configure the length of time for which they are stored The size of the audit log depends on how often system events are generated and the length of time they are stored To avoid excessive use of disk space store the audit logs only for the necessary time A recommended setting is between a week and a month To configure the length of time for which the audit logs are saved in the database 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Devices in the navigation area and then click Recorders The Recorders screen appears in the display area 3 Double click the IP Engine or select the IP Engine and then click Update The general settings
127. MS R310 Table of Contents 10 CHECKING THE CONNECTION WITH MAXPRO VMS SERVER 303 CHECKING THE DEVICE LISTING IN THE DEVICES WINDOW 304 CHECKING THE LIVE VIDEO FROM CAMERAS 306 CHECKING THE PLAYBACK OF RECORDED VIDEO 307 CHECKING THE BOOKMARK FEATURE s 309 CHECKING THE PLAYBACK LOOP IN THE TIMELINE WINDOW 310 CHECKING THE PANNING TILTING AND ZOOMING 311 CHECKING FOR ACKNOWLEDGEMENT AND CLEARING OF ALARMS 312 CHECKING FOR THE CREATION OF IMAGES 314 CHECKING THE CREATION OF CLIPS 315 CHECKING THE SENDING AND RECEIVING OF OPERATOR MESSAGES 316 CHECKING THE SURROUNDING CAMERAS FEATURE 317 CHECKING THE SAVING THE SALVO LAYOUT USING THE SALVO VIEW FEATURE 318 CHECKING THE DEVICE LISTING IN My DEVICES WINDOW 319 CHECKING THE SEARCH FOR RECORDED VIDEO 320 CHECKING THE GENERATION OF EVENT HISTORY AND OPERATOR LOG REPORT 321 OVERVIEW 323 BEFORE YOU BEGIN dd Oe doe 323 UPGRADING VMS R300 TO VMS R310 324 BEFORE YOU BEGIN 220 325
128. O VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 77 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE OE sq express 2012 Scenarios 78 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Configuring MAXPRO VMS involves setting up the application to perform surveillance operations This is the most important phase for commissioning MAXPRO VMS as it involves organizing devices users and roles associated to them BEFORE YOU BEGIN e Ensure that you have completed MAXPRO VMS server and client hardware setup and software installation e Configure the firewall settings as mentioned in the Firewall Settings section FIREWALL SETTINGS See the following tables while configuring the firewall settings for MAXPRO VMS SERVER SIDE CONFIGURATION The following server side application executable files need to be excluded with the following port configuration Application Description Port Port Number Trinity SystemServices Server Operations TCP Custom 20007 s Controller TCP Custom 26026 DNS Server TCP Custom 53 Trinity Controller exe Controller TCP Custom 26026 Operations Scheduler Scheduler TCP Custom 20010 Operations MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 77 78 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Firewall Settings RECORDERS Ports Port Port Number Programs DCOM Serv
129. Output Name box type the name for the monitor In the Description box type a description for the monitor In the Callup Number box an automatic number is allocated by default The operator uses this number to select a monitor from the keyboard In the Site box select the location in which the monitor is used Select the Lock VideoOutput check box to lock monitor from displaying video Note A monitor can be locked or unlocked by selecting or clearing the Lock VideoOutput check box When a monitor is locked no operations on the monitor are allowed including the multi monitor function 10 11 In the Default Video Source box type the camera callup number of the camera from which the live video is to be displayed In the Default Scan Sequence box type the scan sequence number Select the Run Default Scan Sequence check box to automatically begin the default scan sequence In the Slot box type the slot number to identify the slot location of the video output channel Click Switcher if the monitor is connected to a switcher and then select the required switcher in the Switcher drop down list Specify the following details Settings Description Text Inserter Address of the subrack that contains the text insertion card is SubrackID displayed by default The valid range of subrack addresses is 1 799 a value of 0 indicates the text is not used Text Inserter Type the slot number within the subrack w
130. See Adding a Partition for more information To associate partitions to alarm input 1 Click the Partitions tab The screen displays the associated partitions if any Click Associate The Select Partitions dialog box appears 2 3 Select the check box corresponding to the partition name you want to associate 4 Click OK The selected partition is displayed in the list of associated partitions MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Alarm Inputs To disassociate partitions from alarm input e Select the check box corresponding to the partition name and then click Remove DELETING THE ALARM INPUT You can delete an alarm input when you do not want external device to raise an alarm All the associations made to the alarm inputs are removed when you delete it Before you begin e Disassociate Partitions Associating Partitions to the Alarm Input for more information To delete alarm input 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Devices in the navigation area and then click Alarm Inputs The Alarm Input screen appears in the display area Select the check box corresponding to the alarm inputs that you want to delete 4 Click Delete A confirmation message appears on the top of the display area Click Yes UPDATING THE ALARM INPUT You can update alarm input to change its association with a partition and also to modify its settings To update alarm inp
131. T 171 DELETING A VIDEO OUTPUT DEVICE lesse hh 173 UPDATING A VIDEO OUTPUT DEVICE lesse has 173 LOCKING THE DISPLAY ON THE MONITOR llle hh 173 ASSOCIATING PARTITIONS TO VIDEO 5 173 ASSOCIATING VIDEO OUTPUTS TO EVENT 174 ASSOCIATING VIDEO OUTPUTS TO JOYSTICK 174 JOYSTICK CONTROLLERS RE Re Pu REA p Da eii 175 CONFIGURING JOYSTICK CONTROLLER sse a 175 CONNECTING THE KEYBOARD TO MAXPRO 175 SIGN ON AND SIGN OFF o 0 ee hh 176 CONFIGURING THE SIGN ON AND SIGN OFF FEATURE sese he 176 UPDATING A JOYSTICK CONTROLLER sese hehehe 177 SWITCHERS do e DC P did doe pied de da iei Ear P oid 179 ADDING A SWITCHER s 4i cs prz beoe Re x aeu wb Lo er a e dace dele aes 179 UPDATING SWITCHER aeoeaii aa i m aree RU Dae e RAD S e NUR Det e I E o e Res 184 DELETING SWITCHER 0 ing ereina cee eee hh hh 184 ASSOCIATING PARTITIONS TO SWITCHER 0 cece cee ence ha 185 ASSOCIATING EVENTS TO SWITCHER 0 00 cece 185 MAXPRO VMS R310 Table of Contents RELAYS gx Du Saree ove ee a he dolar d we oe a aa deed ad 188 ADDING THE RELAY o setr 0044 S000 4e ee EX etur ke E ea e 188 DELETING
132. To turn a feature off clear its check box A filled box means that only part of the feature is turned di NET Framework 3 5 includes NET 2 0 and 3 0 Windows Communication Foundation HTTP Activation V Windows Communication Foundation Non HTTP Activation Framework 4 5 Advanced Services 140 Active Directory Lightweight Directory Services j Hyper V Internet Explorer 10 Internet Information Services Internet Information Services Hostable Web Core Media Features di Microsoft Message Queue Server II Network Proiection Figure 1 2 Windows Features Select the following check boxes and then click OK e Net Framework 3 5 includes Net2 0 and 3 0 e Windows Communication Foundation HTTP Activation e Windows Communication Foundation Non HTTP Activation To enable NET 3 5 on Windows Server 2012 machine using internet connection i Navigate to Server Manager gt Manage and then click Add Roles and features link Or Navigate to Server Manager gt Dashboard gt Configure this local server and then click Add Roles and features link as shown below WW Local Server Big All Servers E App Server Wi File and Storage Services gt is ROLES AND SERVER GROUPS File and Storage 1 App Server 1 UR beris 9 1 fe is 1 Managwabity D Managearity Manageabi
133. XPRO NVR 11 Deni Dial Carvers conr Delat Diable Cartera down Deisut Cartera down g30 ggmgoogmgmcgu 5 3 Digi Fd Camasa Enterpr 1 Oe Camara Feed Camera 233 3 Dagta Feed Camera Enterprise 233 m v Thee meme ux Delete 5 Choose the required Ascending or Descending option The columns information is arranged accordingly as shown in figure 23 CHOOSE THE COLUMNS TO DISPLAY You can choose the attributes of video input s to display in the screen To choose the columns to display 1 Right click on any column header and then point to Choose Columns The available column names are displayed 2 Select or clear the required column Based on the selection the column table are displayed UPDATING A VIDEO INPUT You can update the camera to change the existing settings and configure new settings To update a video input 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Devices in the navigation area and then click Video Inputs The Video Inputs screen appears in the display area 3 Double click the video input or select the check box corresponding to the video input and then click Update 4 The Video Input screen appears Update the required settings Click Save DELETING A VIDEO INPUT You can delete a video input when you do not want to record video
134. YOU BEGIN 1 Stop Trinity Analytics Services a Choose Start gt Run and then type services msc The Services window appears b Right click Trinity Analytics Service and then select Stop 2 Stop Trinity Services a Choose Start gt Run and then type services msc The Services window appears b Right click TrinityContoller and then select Stop c Right click TrinityServer and then select Stop To remove MAXPRO VMS R310 completely 1 Insert the MAXPRO VMS R310 setup DVD in the DVD drive browse to the MAXPRO VMS R310 setup folder and then double click Setup exe or Go to the MAXPRO VMS R310 setup folder in your computer and then double click Setup exe The Setup Type dialog box appears MAXPRO YMS R310 Enterprise Edition Setup Type Select the setup type that best suits your needs R310 Enterprise Edition Install Figure 3 37 Setup Type 2 Select Remove All and then click Next The following confirmation message appears Question B Do you want to completely remove the selected application and all ES ofits features Figure 3 38 Confirmation Message MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 65 66 INSTALLING THE VMS R310 SOFTWARE Removing the MAXPRO VMS R310 Software 3 Click Yes The Restoring Trinity Database dialog box appears MAXPRO YMS R310 Enterprise Edition Restoring TrinityDatabase Do you want to retain the TrinityDatabase Ves No I
135. You can install roles and features on a running physical computer or virtual machine or on an offline virtual hard disk VHD Role based or feature based installation Configure a single server by adding roles role services and features Server Selection Remote Desktop Services installation Install required role services for Virtual Desktop Infrastructure VDI to create a virtual machine based or session based desktop deployment Install Figure I 5 Select Installation type MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 29 30 SETTING UP THE CLIENT AND THE SERVER COMPUTERS Enabling Windows NET 3 5 3 Click Role based or feature based installation option and then click Next The Select Destination Server screen appears DESTINATION SERVER Select destination server WIN XHMQOSE28H5 Before You Begin Select a server or a virtual hard disk on which to install roles and features Installation Type Select a virtual hard disk Server Roles Server Pool Features Filter Name IP Address Operating System WIN KHMQOSE28H5 E Microsoft Windov 2012 Standard 1 Computer s found This page shows servers that are running Windows Server 2012 and that have been added by using the Add Servers command in Server Manager Offline servers and newly added servers from which data collection is still incomplete are not shown Figure 1 6 Select
136. a recorder see Connecting the relay to the Recorder Network For details on connecting to a network see Connecting Relay to the Network High Level Device For details on connecting to a high level device see Connecting Relay to the High Level Device 8 Select the LINK check box if you want to broadcast the status changes and actions performed on the current relay on the network 9 Select the Output Default State On check box if you want the relay to be set to On when the MAXPRO VMS is started 10 Associate Partitions 11 Click Save The Trigger Relay options appear 12 Click On to trigger relay MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 189 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE 13 Click Off to stop relay CONNECTING RELAY TO THE SWITCHER Before you begin e Add Switchers See Adding a Switcher for more information To connect relay to a switcher 1 From the Switcher drop down list select the required switcher The Switcher Settings appear Note In the SubrackID box the Subrack ID number where the relay module resides is displayed automatically The valid range is 1 99 If a high level or mimic panel output is used the number is prefixed with an H If a keyboard output is used the number is prefixed with a For VideoBlox subrack this represents the V communication port number to which the VideoBlox alarm concentrator AVBPIT is connected Valid r
137. ack this represents the physical control input slot number from AVBPIT alarm concentrator Valid range is 1 to 255 3 Click Save ASSOCIATING PARTITIONS TO THE RELAY You can associate partition to relay Associating a partition to a relay restricts a non associated user of the relay from changing the settings of the relay Before you begin e Add a Partition See Adding a Partition for more information To associate partitions to relay 1 Click the Partitions tab The screen displays the associated partitions if any aah Rept Figure 4 37 Relays Partitions 2 Click Associate The Select Partitions dialog box appears 3 Select the check box corresponding to the partition name you want to associate 4 Click OK The selected partition is displayed in the list of associated partitions To disassociate partitions to relay e Select the check box corresponding to the partition name and then click Remove DELETING THE RELAY You can delete a relay when you no longer want to trigger a task that is based on a relay Before you begin e Disassociate Partitions Associating Partitions to the Relay for more information To delete a relay 1 Click the Configurator tab MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 193 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE 2 Expand Devices in the navigation area and then click relays The Relays screen appears in the display area 3 Select the check box corre
138. ails to install the selected component you can clean the system using the Uninstall Utility and then reinstall the R310 software See Cleaning the System RUNNING THE DRIVER SCRIPTS MANUALLY After installing the drivers in Client PC for example NVR Driver Digital Sentry HRDP HRXD VMS in VMS Milestone LG Panasonic EXACQ GeViScope Pelco Endura If the Client PC is upgraded to Server PC then the respective driver scripts does not load the configurations in the MAXPRO VMS R310 Viewer User should run the corresponding script manually for example HRDPUnInstallationScript sql PelcoInstallationScript sql from the Tools Tools SQLScripts DVRScripts folder 60 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Video Analytics Server Installation VIDEO ANALYTICS SERVER INSTALLATION BEFORE YOU BEGIN Ensure that the MAXPRO VMS server is installed 1 Perform steps 1 through 13 in the section How to Install MAXPRO VMS The Installation Type dialog box appears MAXPRO VMS R310 Enterprise Edition Installation Type om Installation Cancel Figure 3 30 Installation Type 2 Select Custom Installation and then click Next The Select Features dialog box appears MAXPRO YMS R310 Enterprise Edition Select Features Select the featur up will install IP Engine IHRDP Digitalsentry Milestone MaxproNVR MaxprovMS LILG JExacq GeViScope Panasonic
139. ame of the server in this case trinity controller appears Description Type a description for the controller Real Time Clock Accuracy in Type a value to correct the drift in the real seconds time clock After the system is installed and is operational the number of seconds gained or lost should be measured over a 24 hour period Type the number of seconds lost or gained in this field The correction factor is entered using for gained time and for lost time 262 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP SITE Trinity Controller Settings Instructions Description Trunk Steal Criteria From the drop down list select a priority Priority Level A user can steal a trunk from another user with a lower priority On Alarm Only A trunk can be stolen if an alarm condition causes a system macro to make a video selection A user cannot steal from another regardless of priority e Never Steal Trunks are assigned on a first come first serve basis regardless of user priorities Video trunk lines are used for carrying video signals from one system to another These trunk lines are managed automatically by the MAXPRO VMS to service the video selection demands of the users It is possible to run out of video trunk lines and the Trunk Steal Criteria allows the selection of the action that occurs under this congestion
140. an disassociate Recorders from the recorders group Figure 4 64 Select from list Disassociate Select the Recorder from the list and then click Disassociate The selected recorders are successfully disassociated from the Recorder Group message is displayed UPDATING RECORDER GROUP To update a recorder group 1 2 260 In the Recorder Groups screen select the required Recorder Group check boxes Click Update The General settings screen for Recorder Group displays Or Double click the required recorder group from the list The General settings screen for specific Recorder Group displays MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorder Groups Recorder Group Server ditake Recorder Geop acorda List ol recorders configured under 57 Enterprise 4 Disassoclate Recorders Figure 4 65 Update Recorder Group 3 Repeat the steps 7 and step 8 of Associating recorder to Recorder Groups to associate recorder 4 Repeat the steps of Disassociating Recorders from the Recorder Groups to disassociate recorders 5 Click Close DELETING RECORDER GROUP To delete the recorder groups you need to first disassociate the recorders under that group See Disassociating Recorders from the Recorder Groups Note Deleting recorder group deletes the recorder service but the load is carried over to the actual contr
141. an navigate to each of these tabs and change the configured settings as applicable FILTERING AND GROUPING THE RECORDERS Filter feature enables you to filter and group the required number of recorder columns Filtering recorders can be performed in two ways a By dragging and dropping specific column headers to group with the other columns b By defining the row values to display the required columns To filter and group the recorder columns by drag and drop 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Devices in the navigation area 3 Click the Recorders branch The Recorders screen appears in the display area e Recorders x Rincon bars Deag conor Sap to by that Moneywell pereyanil harar Meet imm rone vedi eno dere Monee Acme morer marty ALM i74 Figure 4 11 Recorder Filtering 4 Drag and drop the required columns in upper header area to view the corresponding column details Or Right click on the required column name and then choose Group by or Ungroup by option Example 1 If you want to view the details of only Name Type and IP columns at once drag and drop the columns one after another to the upper header area as shown below 110 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders
142. and Chmielewskiego 22a 70 028 Szczecin Polska www ultrak pl 95 48 91 485 40 60 Honeywell Security Czech Republic Havr nkova 33 Brno Doln Herspice 619 00 Czech Republic www olympo cz 95 420 543 558 111 Honeywell Security Slovakia Republic Vajnorsk 142 83104 Bratislava Slovakia www olympo sk 95 421 2 444 54 660 Honeywell www honeywellvideo com HVSsupport honeywell com Document 800 20433 A 02 2015 2015 Honeywell International Inc All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced by any means without written permission from Honeywell Video Systems The information in this publication is believed to be accurate in all respects However Honeywell Video Systems cannot assume responsibility for any consequences resulting from the use thereof The information contained herein is subject to change without notice Revisions or new editions to this publication may be issued to incorporate such changes
143. ange V maximum communication ports 2 Inthe Subrack Slot type a slot number within the control subrack where the control output module resides Note The valid slot numbers are 1 32 for I O and combination video I O subracks and 1 for HD Series subracks For VideoBlox subrack this represents the physical control input slot number from AVBPIT alarm concentrator Valid range is 1 to 255 3 Inthe Output Bit section select the required output that needs to be controlled by the relay Each relay can control one or more output bits Click Select if you want all the output bits to be controlled by a single relay 4 Click Save CoNNECTING RELAY TO THE ANALOG CAMERA Before you begin e Add Cameras See Adding a Camera for more information To connect relay to an analog camera 1 From the Analog Camera drop down list select the required camera The Device Settings appears 190 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Relays Note In the SubrackID box the Subrack ID number where the relay module resides is displayed automatically The valid range is 1 99 If a high level or mimic panel output is used the number is prefixed with an If a keyboard output is used the number is prefixed with a K For VideoBlox subrack this represents the V communication port number to which the VideoBlox alarm concentrator AVBPIT is connected Vali
144. appears in the display area Recorders e 0613 Videoinputs x Dein Recorders Drag and dene har to group ty rad coker Mino oye Val ANT Orbe Type T Ste Aoa Seidio Suho C fos n Fad Camera thai 65 Rev aen reis Doa no Fund Commer Bid 65 Rev 5 Dish pmm 7 P iher Corim Coens Om ATE 1065 Digtal Fed Camera Buld 68 Rev C Celok Ow RTSP Strem 20065 Digtal ad Dus d Rev C Cuabled comand Roles m RTSP Stren 3865 Digla Fand Camera Bull 65 Rev C LI MT Caen OUS Groups ives ae MR INC Amd us RTSP trem 405 Maed Camera Dud 65 Rev C 10 Deed e mes By Sears D us RTSP Stren 865 Ota Camera Bold 05 Rev 1 Deiak Osatied rwa Workin e nnm n RTSP 6BES Pand Canara 65 Rew C L Defadh mya Event Groga Ow w RTSP B65 Pied Camera Bul 65 Rev C 1 Defaut Cwablad Arg Comma n RTSP Stren RAS Feed Comer Bd 68 Rew C u Ceint Caren Spies Mont Bow c Cdn ie n Digtal Fined Camera Bul 5 Rey C Defouk 5 server 4 Recorder Gra How iw Acan IP Dpt 2 Camera Rev C Corer nus rdi rust n usi Camera lid 65 Re
145. ar the automatic clip deletion value alarms are raised more frequently To manage disk space 1 2 Click the Configurator tab Expand Devices in the navigation area and then click Recorders The Recorders screen appears in the display area Double click the IP Engine or select the IP Engine and then click Update The general settings for the IP Engine appear Click the Advance Settings tab The advance settings for the IP Engine appear Click the Disk Space tab In the Camera Server box select the server for which you want to configure the disk space In the Disk box select the disk for which you want to configure the space Configure the following disk properties according to your requirements Disk Property Description Raise a low disk space alarm when free disk space reaches Alarm is raised when the free disk space falls below the specified value Minimum value is 1000 MB Automatically delete clips when free disk space reaches If selected video clips are automatically deleted when the free space on the disk falls below the specified value Minimum value is 1000 MB This value must be less than the low disk space alarm value Allow deletion of clips marked for archiving If selected video clips that are marked for archiving are deleted Raise a very low disk space alarm when free disk space reaches Low disk space alarm is raised if the free disk space falls below this value Minimum value
146. ask and default gateway if the camera has a static IP address 280 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Scheduler SCHEDULER You can create jobs in MAXPRO VMS to back up data and also to clean up the database You can associate these jobs to schedulers MAXPRO VMS currently has a default scheduler and it is recommended to retain the default settings UPDATING A SCHEDULER To update a scheduler 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Scheduling in the navigation area and then click Scheduler The Scheduler screen appears in the display area 3 Click Update The Scheduler General Settings screen appears Detour x m Pott x0 Scheduler Figure 4 75 Scheduler General Settings 4 Inthe IP Address box the default IP address displays You can type a new IP address as applicable 5 Inthe Port Number box the default port number displays You can type a new port number as applicable 6 In the Description box the default description displays You can type a new description for the scheduler as applicable Associate Partitions See Associating Partitions to Scheduler for more information 8 Associate Events Associating Events and Event Attributes to a Scheduler for more information 9 Click Save ASSOCIATING EVENTS AND EVENT ATTRIBUTES TO A SCHEDULER You can associate one or more events to the
147. atabase server PreferredDatabase PreferedDatabase Machine name of the ServerChanged ServerName preferred Database server NetworkHealthCh Health Status Possible health values like anged OK Failure and Unknown DiskHealthChang Health Status Possible health values like ed OK Failure and Unknown ComputerName Machine name of the Camera Server DiskName Disk drive name of the Camera Server Computer ess E DatabaseServerFa PreferedDatabase Machine name of the ilover ServerName preferred Database Server CameraServerHea Health Status Machine name of the IthChanged Camera Server CameraServerNa Possible health values like me OK Failure and Unknown CameraDeleted CameraAdded MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 103 104 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders Recorder Event Name Event Attribute Description Attributes DiskHealthOk Health Status Possible health values like OK Failure and Unknown ComputerName Machine name of the Camera Server DiskName Disk drive name of the Camera Server Computer Mc cse Disk Health CameraName Possible health values like Unknown OK Failure and Unknown Health Status Machine name of the Camera Server ComputerName Disk drive name of the Camera Server Computer Le se GE DatabaseServerHe Health Status Possible health values like althChanged OK Failure and Unknown Database Server Machine name of the Name Data
148. ation e Camera control settings For configuring the PTZ settings camera control protocol and VCL options See Configuring Camera Control for the Cameras Connected to the IP Engine for more information e Motion Detection settings See Motion Detection Settings Video Motion for more information and Object Tracking and Classification settings For configuring the recording of video when motion is detected See Object Tracking and Classification Settings for more information e Schedules For configuring the scheduled recording See Schedules for more information MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 125 126 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs CONFIGURING RECORD SETTINGS FOR THE CAMERAS CONNECTED TO THE IP ENGINE Before you begin Configure the camera settings See Adding a Camera for more information Associate the recorders See Associating Recorder to a Video Input Device for more information To configure the record settings 1 2 3 Click the Advanced Settings tab The Record Settings appear In the Record Settings area select the Use same settings as live viewing check box to use the same settings as live viewing Configure the settings in the User or Intercom Activated area The following table lists the settings in the User or Intercom Activated area Settings Pre record for Description The duration of video that the IP Engine keeps in memory When
149. ator tab 2 Expand Scheduling in the navigation area and then click SMTP Server Setting The SMTP Server Settings screen appears in the display area Emad ID to be shown in From Stop Sending Emat Enable SS 79063 Figure 4 83 SMTP Server Settings 3 Inthe Host Name box type a host name Click Ping to verify the connection The field appears in green if the IP address or the host name is valid 4 Inthe Port Number box the port number displays by default In the User Name box type a name for the user In the Password text box type a password for the user Note Select the Use Default Credentials check box if you want to use the credentials that were used while logging on 7 In the From box type the email address that should appear when an email is sent Note Select Stop Sending Email if you do not want to send an email from the configured settings 8 Select the Enable SSL check box to enable the SSL settings 9 Click Save MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 291 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE IER Creating an Email Template CREATING AN EMAIL TEMPLATE Ct ee You can create an email template in MAXPRO VMS and use it while sending email notification about alarms to users To configure email template 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Scheduling in the navigation area and then click Email Template The Email Template screen a
150. base Server LowDiskSpace Health Status Possible health values like OK Failure and Unknown ComputerName Machine name of the Camera Server DiskName Disk drive name of the Camera Server Computer reg CB MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders Recorder Event Name Event Attribute Description Attributes Enterprise Encoder Encoder Name Name of the encoder The Connected format is encodername Station ID Encoder ID Numeric value of the Encoder ID Station ID Numeric value of the Station ID Device Type Type of encoder IP Address IP Address of encoder Encoder Encoder Name Name of the encoder The Disconnected format is encodername Station ID Encoder ID Numeric value of the Encoder ID Station ID Numeric value of the Station ID Device Type Type of encoder IP Address IP Address of encoder Encoder Enabled Encoder Name Name of the encoder The format is encodername Station ID Encoder ID Numeric value of the Encoder ID Station ID Numeric value of the Station ID Device Type Type of encoder IP Address IP Address of encoder Encoder Disabled Encoder Name Name of the encoder The format is encodername Station ID Encoder ID Numeric value of the Encoder ID Station ID Numeric value of the Station ID Device Type Type of encoder IP Add
151. box corresponding to the event you want to enter remarks 2 Click the cell under the Remarks column and type the remarks 3 Type the remarks you want to enter To assign macros 1 Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to assign macros 2 Click the cell under the Start Procedure column and then type the required macro 3 Click the cell under the End Procedure column and then type the required macro MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 187 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE RELAYS Relay is an output contact that can be triggered from MAXPRO VMS Relays can be connected to devices like switcher recorder cameras keyboard and high level device Relays send signals that perform various actions For example you can set a relay to open the door automatically when a motion is detected in a particular region ADDING THE RELAY Before you begin e Add Site See Adding a Site for more information e Add Switcher See Adding a Switcher for more information Add Recorder Adding a Recorder for more information Add Partition See Adding a Partition for more information e Update Joystick Controller See Updating a Joystick Controller for more information By default a site and a partition are available You can associate the relay to them or create new To add a relay 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Devices in the navigation area and then click Relays The Relays screen a
152. by default Input Number Type the video input number on the subrack 5 From the Digital Monitor TV out select the required monitor 6 Inthe Connected To section select the Recorder See Associating Recorder to a Video Input Device for more information Note Only Enterprise recorder can be associated 7 Select Link if you wan to broadcast the status changes and actions performed on the current video input device on the network 8 Click Save MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 163 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE VIDEO OUTPUTS You can add various video output devices in MAXPRO VMS You can add digital and analog monitors The following types of video output devices are supported e Monitor Analog and Digital e Standard Device other devices freeze frames and so on e Smart Device devices such as multiplexers e Trunk trunk video input from a networked system e VCR video cassette recorder dedicated or Dub VCR e Standby VCR Standby VCR as used in VCR Management e Digital Output Trunk to view analog camera video Analog monitors are connected to the switchers and display video from analog cameras The digital monitors are connected to the client workstations Each client workstation can connect up to four digital monitors VIDEO OUTPUTS AND PARTITIONS A partition is a logical grouping of video devices Partitions are associated to
153. c panel alarm is used the number is prefixed with an If a keyboard alarm is used the number is prefixed with a For VideoBlox Subrack this ID represents the V communication port number to which the VideoBlox alarm concentrator AVBPIT is connected Valid range is V maximum communication ports Subrack Slot This field defines the slot number within the control subrack where the alarm input module resides Valid slot numbers are 1 32 for I O and combination video I O subracks and 15 17 for HD Series subracks For VideoBlox Subrack this number represents the alarm concentrator AVBPIT number Valid range is 0 to 255 3 Onthe Event Settings tab specify the following details Settings Description Event Description a description for the event Start Macro Type an alarm start macro When an alarm condition is detected for an alarm input the alarm start macro is executed Finish Macro Type an alarm finish macro When a detected alarm input returns to its normal state the alarm finish macro is executed Global ID Type a unique global ID If the Global Event ID is not assigned MAXPRO VMS assigns a unique global ID automatically when you save the event settings Severity Type a severity level Note Severity level is set to trigger alarms when the threshold is met For example if the threshold is set 50 in the preferences tab an alarm is
154. camera option is selected from the context menu while playing or viewing live video The range of valid camera numbers is 1 999999999 Zero 0 is the default value and indicates no alternate camera is defined Alternate Type the camera view number or preset number to select the preset Camera View view for the alternate camera The valid camera views range is 1 99 0 is the default value which indicates no camera view is to be selected 4 Inthe Connected To area select Recorder if you want to connect the camera to a recorder see Associating Recorder to a Video Input Device for more information Select Switcher if you want to connect the camera to a switcher see Associating a Switcher to a Video Input for more information Note If you select Recorder check box then Input Number Recorder text box is displayed Type the input number for recorder 5 Select the Net Source box when you want to view a video from a camera connected to the MAXPRO VMS within a network configuration Specify the following details Settings Description Net Source Specify the network node and the camera number from which you want the video input When the current video input is actually connected to another MAXPRO VMS within a network configuration the Net Source field is used to specify the exact location and reference for the video input device Link Select if you want to broadcast the status changes and actions
155. cene The default is Indoors High Sub sampling Reduces the effective resolution of the image used for detecting motion The greater the level of sub sampling the lower the load on the CPU required for motion detection The values are e nosub sampling the resolution of the image is not changed e 2 the resolution of the image and the load on the CPU are halved e 4 the resolution of the image and the load on the CPU are quartered The default is 2 Note Increasing the sub sampling might increase the chance of a false detection Minimum object size Select the minimum size of an object for which motion can be detected expressed in pixels The minimum size you can specify is limited by the sub sampling property according to the following formula 4 x sub sampling 2 For example if you set sub sampling to 2 the minimum object size you can specify is 16 pixels The maximum object size is 64 pixels If objects in the scene you want to detect motion are large increasing the minimum object size can prevent false detections caused by small movement changes 134 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE WHEN MOTION 15 DETECTED PROPERTIES Specify the When Motion is Detected properties as follows Settings Consider motion finished after Description The length of time after motion was last detected that motion is considered
156. chers screen appears in the display area Total Record Court 0 Alam s 11761 60334 AM Figure 4 31 Switchers MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 179 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE 3 Click Add The General Settings appear Sector Type Ste I lt Alanis 11763 504 Figure 4 32 Switcher General Settings 4 Inthe Switcher Name box type the name of the switcher In the Description box type a description for the switcher 6 Inthe Switcher Type drop down list select the type of switcher The following are the available type of switchers e Vicon e Burle e AmericanDynamics e PelcoSwitcher e VideoBlox e MaxPro Note Selecting MaxPro enables the Primary Subrack ID box 7 Inthe Primary Subrack ID box type the address of the subrack Note Valid primary subrack addresses range from 1 99 A value of 0 indicates that no video switching occurs when the device is selected For VideoBlox subrack this ID represents the V communication port number to which the VideoBlox analog video input cards are connected The valid primary subrack address is V maximum communication ports Suffix A with primary subrack ID for example V1A indicates that the audio is enabled for that particular video input 8 From the Site drop down list select the location to which you want to connect the switcher 9 From t
157. ck before they are automatically archived To ensure that the clips are not deleted before archival set the period lesser than the period in Delete after The period starts when the recording of the video clip ends Delete after The video clips stored for this period before being automatically deleted The period starts when the recording of the video clip ends CoNFIGURING CAMERA CONTROL FOR THE CAMERAS CONNECTED TO THE IP ENGINE You can configure PTZ settings camera control protocol and VCL options using the camera control option Before you begin e Configure the camera settings See Adding a Camera for more information e Associate the recorders See Associating Recorder to a Video Input Device for more information To configure camera control 1 Click Advanced Settings tab by default the Recorder Settings tab is displayed 2 Click the Camera Control tab The Camera Control settings appear 3 Select the type of camera control protocol supported by the camera in the Camera control type list The types include 128 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide e Fixed Camera no camera control e Honeywell KD6 Pelco e Honeywell KD6 VCL CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs e Pelco Dome supports Pelco P protocol e Sensormatic supports Sensormatic RS 485 protocol e Use streamer settings The camera control drivers for some of the new Axis streamers suc
158. corders screen appears in the display area Figure 4 13 Recorder Screen 112 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders 4 Click Filter dialog box is displayed as shown below fk E Select All AUDIO AUDIO 191 B2 HD4MDIH Rajeev1 B2 HD4MDIH Rajeev1 154 B2 HD4MDIH Rajeev12 418 B2 HD4MDIH Rajeev12 418 152 B2 HD4MDIHX Rajeev2 416 B2 HD4MDIHX Rajeev2 416 150 B4 HD441P Shekari B4 HD441P Shekari 189 B4 HD441PX Shekar2 DA UIMNAATOV Shain Mx gt Show rows with value that is equal to 3 Tr T eg Fs ep Ard zi is equal to 21 5 Under Select All select the required check boxes to display row elements as shown below MAXPEO v N MAXPRO N P MAXPRO MAXPRO N apte em tat calo that dmn to OR In the Show rows with value that perform the following a Select the required option from the Is equal to drop down list b Type the required value corresponding to your selection Select the required option from the AND Or drop down list d Select the required option from the Is equal to drop down list corresponding to your option selected e Type the required value corresponding to your selections M
159. crosoft com en us library aa967729 v vs 110 aspx 13 Click Next The MAXPRO VMS Server is installed and the InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box appears MAXPRO MS R310 Enterprise Edition InstallShield Wizard Complete iield Wizard has s ly installed MAXPRO VMS 0 Click Finish to exit the InstallShield 4 Figure 3 21 Install Shield Wizard Complete 14 Click Finish The computer restarts and the installation is complete 54 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Custom Installation Note At any point if the R310 installation fails to install the selected components then you must clean the system using the Uninstall Utility and reinstall the R310 software See Cleaning the System CLIENT INSTALLATION 1 Perform steps 1 through 13 in the section How to Install MAXPRO VMS The Installation Type dialog box appears MAXPRO YMS R310 Enterprise Edition Installation Type stalled and Installed Figure 3 22 Installation Type MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 55 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Custom Installation 2 Select Custom Installation and then click Next The Select Features dialog box appears MAXPRO MS R310 Enterprise Edition up will install Select the Features you want to install and deselect the Features you do not want to install s components
160. ct the check box corresponding to the intercept key you want to delete Click Delete A confirmation message appears on top of the display area Click Yes MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 251 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE OE cogi comer LOGICAL CAMERA Logical camera selection allows cameras to be grouped together so that selection of a particular camera is made more easy for the user Instead of selecting the camera by its number the user can select the group the camera belongs to followed by a number within that group For example Camera 1234 can instead be selected as Level 1 Cameras 5 with the name of the group in this case Level 1 Cameras being selected by a single button press This speeds up and simplifies the selection of video inputs You can add a logical camera and associate it to the Joystick Controller Before you begin e Add Camera See Adding a Camera for more information e Configure Joystick Controller Configuring joystick controller for more information ADDING A LOGICAL CAMERA To add a logical camera 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Groups in the navigation area and then click Logical Camera The Logical Camera screen appears in the display area 3 Click Add The Group screen for Logical Camera displays Selection prmsryCamer Primaryview MRiCamerac AklView ARDView _ AkiCamerai ARView _ Camera Figure 4 59 Log
161. ction Note All the cameras connected to the recorders would be added The list of cameras appear in the Site window in the Devices tab In case of IP Engine Discover IP Cameras Axis Equip screen appears You can select the cameras that you want to add and the Camera Server Video Clip Directory and Video Format To discover cameras connected to recorders such as IP Engine HRDP 1 Click the Discover Cameras 2 The Discover IP Cameras Axis Equip dialog box appears MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 97 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Discover IP Cameras Axis Equip Step 1 Select Cameras to Add to IPEngine FIseme wae iade Streamer video Stas wat D cCouldnot AXIS 97406 Ch 159 99 186 76 1 Could not resol C couldnot 5 07406 Ch 159 99 186 86 1 Could not resol couldnot AXIS 07406 Ch 159 99 186 84 1 Could not resol Could AXIS 07406 Ch 159 99 186 80 1 Could not resol LH Couldnot AXIS 097406 Ch 159 99 186 85 d Could not resol C couldnot AXIS 97406 Ch 159 99 186 82 1 Could not resol Could AXIS 97406 Ch 159 99 186 77 1 Could not resol O Couldnot AXIS Q7406 Ch 159 99 186 79 1 Could not resol coudnot 5 97406 Ch 159 99 186 81 1 Could not resol C couldnot AXIS 97406 Ch 159 99 186 75 1 Could not resol Step 2 Please select the Site Site Detai
162. curs for the Encoder Name Encoder Attributes are available only for certain events These events can be associated to a recorder multiple times The event attributes are listed in the details of the alarm in Alarm window To view the event attributes of an alarm right click the alarm and then click Show Details To associate events to a recorder 1 Click the Events tab The screen displays the associated events if any Remrdes e Rapidtye 12 x General winter vents Associated Evene Recorder B us Connected Everk attributes settings ae No events currently selected Figure 4 7 Recorder Events 2 Click Associate The Select from List dialog box appears 100 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders Select from List x Event ID Event Description Master Device Name O 559 Output Enabled O 560 Output Disabled O 564 Recorder Settings Retrieved Figure 4 8 Select from List 3 Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to associate 4 Click OK Note For a MAXPRO VMS recorder all the events that are configured for the recorders in the child VMS are displayed Hence the Associate and Remove buttons are disabled To associate any new events you must configure them in the child VMS and again reconfigure the child VMS in the master VMS
163. d range V maximum communication ports 2 Inthe Output Bit section select the required output that needs to be controlled by the relay Each relay can control one or more output bits Click Select if you want all the output bits to be controlled by a single relay Note In the Subrack Slot the slot number within the control subrack where the control output module resides is displayed automatically The valid slot numbers are 1 32 for I O and combination video I O subracks and 1 for HD Series subracks For VideoBlox subrack this represents the physical control input slot number from AVBPIT alarm concentrator Valid range is 1 to 255 3 Click Save CONNECTING RELAY TO THE HIGH LEVEL DEVICE To connect relay to a high level device 1 In the High Level Device box type the device number The Device Settings appear 2 In the SubrackID box type the Subrack ID number where the relay module resides Note The valid range is 1 99 If a high level or mimic panel output is used the number is prefixed with an If a keyboard output is used the number is prefixed with a For VideoBlox subrack this represents the V communication port number to which the VideoBlox alarm concentrator AVBPIT is connected Valid range is V maximum communication ports 3 Inthe Subrack Slot the slot number within the control subrack where the control output module resides is displayed automatically
164. dEye and Axis240Q cameras Note The Video Channel Number field is applicable only to the cameras that support more than one streaming at a time MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 123 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE TE Vices mts Recorder Instructions Type Inthe Video Format drop down list select the type of camera NTSC or PAL Inthe Resolution drop down list select the resolution for the video See Configuring Cameras for IP Engine for more information on configuring this field for GrandEye and HSX cameras Inthe Compression Ratio drop down list select the degree of compression Inthe GOP box type the required group of picture Inthe Frame Rate drop down list select the number of frames per second while capturing a video Control Settings Configure the Control Settings See Control Settings for more information Note The Control Settings tab appears only when PTZ is selected as Camera Type Advanced Recorder Settings See Advance Settings for Cameras Connected to the IP Engine for more information MAXPRO NVR Recorder Settings Inthe PTZ Sensitivity drop down list select a number for PTZ sensitivity Note For more details on the camera specifications for other recorders refer to the manuals that are provided along with the cameras 124 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVI
165. e Configurator tab 2 Expand the User Management branch in the navigation area and then click Roles The Roles screen appears in the display area MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 231 IDEE CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Roles 3 Select the check box corresponding to the role you want to delete 4 Click Delete A confirmation message appears on top of the display area 5 Click Yes 232 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP SITE Sequences SEQUENCES te A sequence is a set of live video streamed one after the other from cameras for a specified time interval You can select the cameras or presets to be included in a sequence and also specify the time interval for which the video from each camera or preset must be displayed Note Presets must be defined for the cameras before including them in the sequence CREATING A SEQUENCE You can create a sequence to display video that is being captured from different cameras located across the sites To create a sequence 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Groups in the navigation area and then click Sequences The Sequences screen appears in the display area Click Add The Scan screen ap
166. e Site for more information ADDING WORKSTATIONS Workstations are client computers in which the MAXPRO VMS user interface is installed The users can perform actions such as monitoring a site generating reports searching for video recording and configuring add update and delete devices from these workstations See Workstations for more information ADDING PARTITIONS A partition is a logical grouping of recorders cameras switchers and monitors in a site A default partition is added when you install MAXPRO VMS You can associate the default partition to cameras and recorders or create new partitions See Partitions for more information Note Partitions are used to limit user access to devices and cameras ADDING ROLES AND USERS A default administrator user with the administrator privileges is created when you install MAXPRO VMS The privileges for a user are defined in roles You can define roles according to your requirements and assign them to users The users are associated to a site Only the users with access to the site can perform actions such as viewing video acknowledging alarms and others based on the user privileges See Users and Roles for more information ADDING CONTACT GROUP AND CONTACTS You can add a contact group of users with different roles and also store a contact in MAXPRO VMS An alarm notification can be configured to a contact group See Contact Group for more information ADDING EVENT GROUPS
167. e Uninstall Utility and then reinstall the R310 software See Cleaning the System AFTER INSTALLING MAXPRO VMS R310 The Loopback Adapters enables to stabilize the network connection in case of any network disconnect momentarily The loopback adapters are required in a site to stabilize the network communication In addition these are recommended for MVMS servers After installing the MAXPRO VMS you must configure the Microsoft Loopback Adapter To configure the Microsoft Loopback Adapter 1 2 Right click My Network Places and then select Properties Locate the LAN or High Speed Internet connection that has a device name of Microsoft Loopback Adapter right click and then select Properties The Local Area Connection Properties dialog box appears Select Internet Protocol TCP IP and then click Properties The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties dialog box appears Select Use the following IP address In the IP address box type the IP address between the range of 10 0 0 0 to 10 255 255 255 or 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255 255 The subnet mask 255 255 255 0 appears in the Subnet mask box Do not set a value for Default gateway Click OK MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Removing the MAXPRO VMS R310 Software REMOVING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE You can remove the MAXPRO VMS R310 completely or some of it s components as per your requirements BEFORE
168. e an alarm input Update Controller To update controller Import To Import files into MAXPRO VMS Export To export the MAXPRO VMS files Configure Equip To configure equip camera Camera Cold Warm Boot To allow user to boot Add Job To add a job Update Job To update a job Delete Job To delete a job Add Contact To add a contact Update Contact To update a contact Delete Contact To delete a contact Add Contact To add a contact group Group Update Contact Group To update a contact group Delete Contact To delete contact group Group Add User To add new users Delete User To allow user to delete new users Modify User To modify user privilege Privilege Add Recorder To allow user to add recorder Update Recorder To allow user to update recorder Delete Recorder To allow user to delete recorder Add Video Input To allow user to add Video Input Update Video Input To allow user to update video input Delete Video Input To allow user to delete video input Add Video Output To allow user to add video output MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Users Privileges Description Update Video To allow user to update video output Output Delete Video T
169. e availability of the host name Inthe Redundant Database Server box type the redundant database server name only if you have a redundant server Select the Time Zone check box to enable the global time zone box and then select the required time zone Select the Enable Client Side PTZ check box to enable PTZ operations directly from the client workstation without using Trinity Controller This feature is useful when MAXPRO VMS client and devices are on the local network and Trinity Controller is on a Wide Area Network WAN Note To configure the advanced settings for IP Engine see Advanced Settings for IP Engine MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 87 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorder Type To configure the device settings HRXD Inthe Site Address box type the numeric IP address or the host name of the HRXD recorder Select the Check for duplicate IP address device name in the database check box to check the availability of the host name Inthe Watch Port box type the port number In the Search Port box type the port number Inthe User ID box type the user name to access the recorder nthe Password box type the password to access the recorder Select the Time Zone check box to enable the global time zone box and then select the time zone from the drop down list Digital Sentry Inthe Site Address box type the numeric IP address or the h
170. e host name is valid Select the Check for duplicate IP address device name in the database check box to check the availability of the host name Inthe Site Port box the port number appears by default Inthe User ID box type the user name to access the recorder Inthe Password box type the assigned password for the user e Select the Time Zone check box to enable the global time zone box and select the required time zone Intellex Inthe Site Address box type the numeric IP address or the host name of the Intellex recorder Click Ping to verify the connection The field appears in green if the IP address or the host name is valid e Select the Check for duplicate IP address device name in the database check box to check the availability of the host name In the Live Port box the port number appears by default You can change the port number as applicable Inthe Event Port box the port number appears by default You can change the port number as applicable Select the Time Zone check box to enable the global time zone box and select the required time zone IPEngine nthe Primary Database Server box type the numeric IP address or the host name of the computer where IP Engine database server is installed Click Ping to verify the connection The field appears in green if the IP address or the host name is valid Select the Check for duplicate IP address device name in the database check box to check th
171. e required macro to end the event Click the Disabled box and then select True or False from the drop down list Click the Severity Level box and edit the severity level MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE User Defined Events Note Severity level is set to trigger alarms when the threshold is met For example if the threshold is set to 50 on the preferences tab an alarm is triggered when threshold becomes 51 12 Click the Normal State box and define the alarm normal state as Closed or Open 13 Click the Operating Mode box and select the operating mode for the alarm The available modes are e Direct The alarm condition activates or de activates when it physically changes state or is set or cleared with macros e Latched Once triggered the alarm will remain active until it is reset manually using the alarm clear key on the keyboard Toggle The first time the alarm is triggered it becomes active the next time it is cleared To add a system generated event 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Associations in the navigation area and then click User Defined Events The User defined event association screen appears in the display area 3 Click Add Follow steps 6 through 11 of See To add and associate an event to devices To add Event Groups to events 1 Selectthe check box corresponding to the device name for which you want to add the Event Grou
172. ears MS R310 Enterprise Edition Database Server Login databa and authentication method Databa ver JSQLEXPRESS uthentication authentication using Login ID and pa Figure 3 7 Database Server Login 2 Click Browse and then select any existing SQL database You can select the existing SQL database on the same network or from a remote computer If you do not want to select an existing database proceed to step 4 Caution If the SQL Server Express instance is available on a remote computer and if you do not have sufficient permissions to fetch the instance then as a result an error message is displayed In this scenario the Database Administrator DBA must execute some SQL scripts so that instance is fetched The scripts are available on the installation DVD For different scenarios on SQL Express 2012 see SQL Express 2012 Scenarios MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 45 INSTALLING THE VMS R310 SOFTWARE 3 Select Connect using option as Windows authentication or SQL Server authentication using Login ID and password below as per the requirement and then click Next You are prompted to install SQL Server 2012 Express MEM SQLEXPRESS does not exist This instance will be created in SQL Server 2012 Express 5 1 Do you want to continue Figure 3 8 Prompt to install SQL Server 2012 Express Note See SQL Express 2012 Scenarios for various SQL 2012 Scenarios
173. ected To section select Recorder check box The Recorder drop down list is enabled 2 Select the recorder The device settings for the recorder appear Perform the instructions listed in the following table Recorder Type RapidEye Instructions Recorder Settings for Fixed Camera Type e In the Live Resolution drop down list select a resolution for the recorder Inthe Live Frame Rate drop down list select a frame rate for the recorder Recorder Settings for PTZ Camera Type Inthe PTZ Sensitivity drop down list select a number for PTZ sensitivity Control Settings e Configure the Control Settings See Control Settings for more information Note The Control Settings tab appears only when PTZ is selected as the Camera Type MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 121 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE TE vere nuts Recorder Type Fusion Instructions Recorder Settings Inthe PTZ Sensitivity drop down list select a number for PTZ sensitivity Note The PTZ Sensitivity drop down list is enabled only when you select the PTZ option in the General Settings See Adding a Camera for more information of the camera The numbers represent the speed of the PTZ The higher the number the more the PTZ speed Control Settings Configure the Control Settings See Control Settings for more information Note The Control Settings tab appears only when PTZ
174. ed to other partitions which are not associated to the assigned role USERS AND J OYSTICK CONTROLLERS Joystick controllers are keyboards that are attached to video outputs in MAXPRO VMS Users are associated to joystick controllers These users can use the associated joystick controllers to carry the video surveillance tasks in MAXPRO VMS USERS AND EVENT GROUPS An event group is a set of events that occur on video devices Users are associated to Event Groups When any event in the event group occurs only the users who are associated to the event group can acknowledge the event USERS AND WORKSTATIONS A workstation is a computer in which the MAXPRO VMS user interface is installed Workstations are associated to Users Users associated to a workstation can log on to MAXPRO VMS user interface and perform various actions Users are directly associated to the workstation which is associated to the role A user can be associated to other workstations also which are not associated to a role ADDING A USER You can add a user by providing a unique user name and a password 208 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Users Only admin can add a new user in MAXPRO VMS After you add a new user you can assign a role to it After the role is assigned to the user the privileges that are defined as a part of the role are also added to the user You can add or remove any privil
175. eges for the specific user role combination using the Customized Privileges option Before you begin e Add Role See Adding a role for more information By default a partition and a workstation are available You can associate a user to them or create new To add a user 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand User Management in the navigation area and then click Users The Users screen appears in the display area quen x aadete Users T Tue eer Name User Descretion Roe oss T 2 perator O pe Total Record Court 2 Discover Update o S MILI 10 EL Figure 4 44 Users 3 Click Add The General Settings tab appears Operator z Pres UserType jm es Pin uber User Priory B Aute Sint Period sees u abst fige On Mero Sign OW 11923 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 209 Po P S um CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Users Figure 4 45 Adding User In the User ID box type a name for the user In the User Name box type the name of the user In the Description box type the required description In the Role box select the role you want to assign to the user Select the Customized Privileges check box to enable or disable privileges for a user The following table lists the privileges you can enab
176. elect required site From the Step 2 Select device types drop down list select the required device type The related devices the associated events the available user contact group and the available devices are displayed In the Step 3 Select Analytics Server select the required analytics server In the Step 4 Select available Events select the required events If you want to select all the events click Select All 7 Inthe Step 5 Select available user contact group select the contact group check box for which the alarm notification needs to be sent If you want to select all the user contact groups click Select All 8 Inthe Step 6 Select available devices select the required available devices check box You can click Expand All to expand the devices tree Similarly you can click Collapse All to collapse the devices tree If you want to select all the available devices click Select All 9 Click Save The selected events for which alarm notification needs to be sent is displayed in the Events Configured for notification section as shown below 288 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Alarm Notification TA Alarm Notification Jed Records frei Arm notficabon Detale deo Ogni iic ny Seryslich Crowder Sewa Sie 2 3 Sec Recode 5 a E Recorders zl narro vts z D Piye
177. ell TrinityFramework bin the default path where MAXPRO VMS is installed Double click MAXPRO_Keyboard_Prototype exe The Simulator dialog box appears In the Keyboard Number box type the input number for the keyboard In the IP Address box type the IP address of the MAXPRO VMS Server Click Power On Sec 0 e SiGN ON AND SIGN OrF Before you sign on and sign off from a joystick controller you must configure the features CONFIGURING THE SiGN ON AND SIGN OFF FEATURE To configure the sign on and sign off feature 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Devices in the navigation area and then click Joystick Controllers The Joystick Controllers screen appears in the display area SER Tt Doystick Controllers x cer Can Perform Update Oparations To Configure Keyboard 3oystick Controller im Joystick Controller Name Joystick Crntroler Enabled Dato Monitor Delo Operator m Tnm Mentor m doves 2 Faka False Fake Fase o fake Fabo Tate Fake fake tobe Fake EELE KE Fake Fase Fake Fate Ham i f Figure 4 29 Joystick Controller 3 Double click the joystick controller for which you want to use the sign on and sign off feature The joystick screen appea
178. eo Analytics ActivEye Forensics tool allows remote users to connect to the Video Analytics database on the server to conduct search and retrieval of past incidents For more details refer to the Video Analytics V4 Reference Guide To access the guide choose Start gt Programs gt Honeywell Video Analytics gt Documentation gt Video Analytics V4 Reference Guide pdf or locate the file in installation DVD HONEYWELL VIDEO ANALYTICS ACTIVEYE LIVE MONITORING STATION Honeywell Video Analytics ActivEye Live Monitoring Station allows remote users to receive live video streams with analytics annotations as well as real time events and alarms across multiple Analytics Servers For more details refer to the Video Analytics V4 Reference Guide To access the guide choose Start Programs Honeyvwell Video Analytics Documentation Video Analytics V4 Reference Guide pdf or locate the file in installation DVD HONEYWELL VIDEO ANALYTICS ACTIVEYE USER CONFIGURATION Honeywell Video Analytics ActivEye User Configuration allows managing user accounts All the client applications require a valid user account to log on to the server and perform various tasks For more details refer to the Video Analytics V4 Reference Guide To access the guide choose Start gt Programs gt Honeywell Video Analytics gt Documentation gt Video Analytics V4 Reference Guide pdf or locate the file in installation DVD ADDING AN ANALYTICS SERVER To add and analyt
179. eport This page is intentionally left blank 322 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide UPGRADING VMS R310 OVERVIEW Ce es This chapter describes a common procedure for upgrading MAXPRO VMS software from e R300 Build 185 to R310 e R300 Build 188 to R310 e R300 SPI to R310 e R300 5 2 to R310 The upgrade procedure is same for all the patches that are released on top of R300 SP1 and SP2 BEFORE YOU BEGIN Ensure that the client and server computers meet the software requirements MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 323 EE o 0 oU UPGRADING MAXPRO VMS R300 rTo MAXPRO VMS R310 See the instructions in the following sections to upgrade to MAXPRO VMS R300 BEFORE YOU BEGIN 1 Stop Trinity Services a Choose Start Run and then type services msc The Services window appears b Right click Trinity Contoller and then select Stop c Right click TrinityServer and then select Stop 2 Stop the recorder Services if you have any recorder client or server installed a Choose Start gt Run and then type services msc The Services window appears b Right click IP Engine Logger and then select Stop The Stop Other Services dialog box appears c Click Yes 3 Update the firewall configuration to allow SQL Server and SQL Express connections Caution For upgrading recorder driver from the MAXPRO VMS R300 to MAXPRO VMS R310 please ensure that your computer has Internet
180. er to the MAXPRO VMS R310 Help MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 309 VERIFYING THE CONFIGURATION OF MAXPRO VMS Du Checking the Playback Loop in the Timeline Window CHECKING THE PLAYBACK LOOP IN THE TIMELINE WINDOW Loops are used for repeatedly playing a portion of video Mark in and mark out points are used to create a loop in the Timeline window You can add a mark in point to mark the start date and time of the loop in the timeline To mark the end date and time of the loop add a mark out point in the timeline The following figure illustrates a loop in the timeline Do ow vo Vy yo pm Br 5 Loops in the Timeline Figure 5 5 Loops Note For more information on how to create loops by adding mark in and mark out points and how to play a loop refer to the MAXPRO VMS R310 Help 310 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide VERIFYING THE CONFIGURATION VMS Checking the Panning Tilting and Zooming CHECKING THE PANNING TILTING AND ZOOMING OHHH HOHE OHHH HHH OHHH HOH HHH OHHH OHHH OOO In MAXPRO VMS you can perform two types of PTZ namely analog PTZ and Digital PTZ Using the digital PTZ feature in MAXPRO VMS you can perform tilting and zooming on live and recorded video and clips You can also perform panning operations on live video and clips The digital PTZ feature when enabled
181. ercept Keys The Intercept Keys screen appears in the display area 3 Click Add The General Settings screen for Intercept Keys displays aah f es gueencexrews Intercept Key 201 General oysti Controller Enter Intercept Key detis Intercept key 0 201 keycode rj Intercept Descretion Intercept Key 201 Key Replacement Macro Key Macro be TRAIT lt TAR 6 29 05 Figure 4 58 Intercept Keys General Settings 4 Inthe Intercept Key ID box next available number is assigned by default In the Key Code box type the key code of the key that is to be intercepted In the Intercept Key Description box type a description for the intercept key for reference if required Note A default sequential Intercept Key name appears in the Intercept Key Description box 7 Inthe Key Replacement Macro box type the desired key replacement macro MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 249 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Note When the specified key press on the selected keyboards is detected the Key Replacement Macro is executed 8 Inthe Key Release Macro box type the desired key release macro Note When the specified key on the selected keyboards is detected the Key Release Macro is executed 9 Associate Joystick Controller See Associating Joystick Controllers to Intercept Keys for more information 10 Click Save
182. ernal source to trigger an alarm whenever an event occurs Note For more information on mapping the events contact your system administrator To add and associate an event to devices Click the Configurator tab Expand Associations in the navigation area and then click User Defined Events The User defined event association screen appears in the display area Click Add amp Associate The Associated Devices dialog box appears TA Associate devices Li GAS abo 2 HCD dinar DespakR 144342 DeepakIT144 0343 Deepak 14 HEDEHIH AIF 57788 wey ntc Associate Cancel Figure 4 68 Associate Devices From the Device filter drop down list select the required device category The device number and the name of the device are listed Select the check box corresponding to the name of the device for which you want to define an event and then click Associate The device appears on the User defined event association screen Note You can select multiple device names by selecting multiple check boxes 10 11 272 In the Global Event ID box type the unique global ID If the Global Event ID is not assigned MAXPRO VMS assigns a unique global ID automatically when you save the event In the Event Description box type a description for the event In the Start Procedure box type the required macro to start the event In the End Procedure box type th
183. et for each region of interest See Defining Conditions for more information DEFINING THE MINIMUM OBJECT SIZE The minimum object size that is tracked by the algorithm is defined by a magenta rectangle MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 137 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE TO ices ints Note The position of the rectangle is not relevant for defining the minimum object size To define the minimum object size 1 Select the rectangle Its selection handles appear 2 Drag a selection handle until the rectangle is of the required size and shape 138 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs TUNING PROPERTIES FOR OBJECT TRACKING Settings Detection frame rate Description The rate at which you want the algorithm to run The default is 5 frames per second This setting has a high impact on the loading of the server The higher the frame rate the higher the load on the CPU It impacts the bandwidth used by the streamer when object tracking is activated The chance of motion being detected depends on e frame rate a higher frame rate increases the chance of motion being detected e size of the region of interest the larger the region of interest the longer the object takes to move through it increasing the chance of motion being detected speed of the object the faster the object
184. et number in the Preset column next to a camera The video from each camera in the list is displayed sequentially Note If the value is zero in the preset column the presets are not included in the sequence By default presets are zero for a fixed camera 12 Click Save PLAYING A SEQUENCE To play a sequence 1 Click the Viewer tab 2 Click the Sequences window 3 Double click the sequence you want to play or select the sequence and then click Play Sequence You can drag and drop the sequence on a panel in the salvo layout You can also play a sequence using the joystick controller Ultrakey keyboard See About Joystick Controllers for more information REARRANGING THE CAMERAS IN THE SEQUENCE You can rearrange the cameras and presets in the sequence When you rearrange them the sequence of live video streaming from each of the cameras is altered based on the rearrangement To rearrange the cameras 1 Select the check box corresponding to the camera you want to rearrange inside the sequence 2 Click t to move the camera one row up or click to move the camera one row down 3 Click Save REMOVING CAMERAS FROM THE SEQUENCE You can delete a camera from a sequence when you do not want to view the live video from it as a part of the sequence To remove cameras from a sequence 1 Inthe Select Cameras list select the check box corresponding to the cameras you want to remove jf Click the
185. etext SubrackID box type the address of the subrack which contains the text insertion card The valid range of subrack addresses is 1 799 a value of 0 indicates pretext is not used 144 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP SITE Video Inputs 6 Inthe Pretext SlotNumber type slot number within the pretext subrack where the text insertion card resides The valid range of slot numbers is 1 32 7 Inthe X and Y boxes type the location of the camera text to be displayed on the monitor Valid positions are 1 13 CONFIGURING CONTROL SETTINGS e Configure the Control Settings for the switchers CONFIGURING ADVANCED SETTINGS FOR MAXPRO AND VIDEOBLOX 1 Click the Advanced Settings tab The Advanced Settings screen appears Note In the Primary Subrack ID the ID that is associated while adding a switcher is displayed by default 2 Inthe ByPass Subrack ID box type the address of the subrack which must be bypassed when selecting the current video input device Note For VideoBlox subrack the Bypass subrack ID value must be 1 16 depending on the input device number For the first 1 255 physical inputs the bypass ID is 1 and for the next 1 255 inputs the bypass ID is 2 and so on 3 In the Combiner Subrack ID box type the ID for cascading and combining configurations In a cascading configuration consisting of three subracks the Combiner Subrack ID contains the
186. etting select the desired setting from the drop down list The value can also be typed into the field 7 Click Save Note Click Restore Default to restore the default settings UPDATING A SERIAL PORT You can update the serial port when you want to change the basic advanced and COM port settings To update a serial port Click the Configurator tab Expand Server in the navigation area Click the Serial Ports branch The serial ports screen appears in the display area Select the check box corresponding serial port you want to update and then click Update Modify the Basic Settings Modify the Advanced Settings Modify the COM Port Settings Click Save 9o 54 Xin de DELETING A SERIAL PORT To delete a serial port Click the Configurator tab Expand Server in the navigation area Click the Serial Ports branch The list of existing serial ports is displayed on the screen Select the check box corresponding to the serial port you want to delete Click Delete A message asking for confirmation appears on the top of the display area Click Yes mx our m 39 qe ge MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 271 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE User Defined Events USER DEFINED EVENTS The devices such as recorders and cameras have predefined events MAXPRO VMS provides an option to customize new events to recorders and cameras These events can be mapped to an ext
187. eyboard networks and high level device See Alarm Inputs for more information MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 83 84 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Setting up a site using Configurator ADDING LOGICAL CAMERAS You can group the cameras using the logical camera option Using the logical camera option selection of a particular camera is made easier See Logical Camera for more information ADDING SEQUENCES You can define sequences to view live video streamed one after the other from cameras for a specified time interval See for more information ADDING SYSTEM MACROS A macro is a rule or pattern that specifies how a certain input sequence often a sequence of characters is mapped to an output sequence or action See System Macros for more information ADDING J OYSTICK CONTROLLERS An Ultrakey keyboard is referred to as the joystick controller Using the Ultrakey keyboard you can perform actions such as selecting a camera in the Viewer tab See Joystick Controllers for more information ADDING INTERCEPT KEYS Frequently used or repetitive sequence of keystrokes can be automated using intercept keys Each intercept key is associated with a macro See Intercept Keys for more information SCHEDULING You can schedule an alarm notification jobs to be performed at a stipulated time configure SMTP setting and create an email template in MAXPRO VMS See Scheduler Jobs SMTP Server Settings Alarm
188. f you want to group the columns by VideoInputName then right click on the Name column and then choose Group by VideoInputName option as shown below Ded 5 d a Ca MR T CalapNunber Vieolrgutame Type ML Saida Addr T Stats Steers 4 Bees gt WIT HCOSHIM V WEHATSHIXC S14 ther omen Contant Gray WET ACOSHIM Pafeevt 417151 Contant W HCCSHD C Rajeev 417 festi WETHBCDSHIHC ARA 175 f ree emm Py Sagares WET ACOSHDACAYQ4 gt 3 173 Stes prom Gaye 410195 intercept Heys Logd Comers Y Vrae 410 Speen Maren KCN 2 63 Recorder v Vean 403 gt t m Orto 408137 Veamt 408 o Association T Jip Vor Dele Ever TE COSMO A98 148 Fund TTE COSHH AIRS oe Migrator rem T AHHCDSMIHCAVLACUOS s T HCDSMIHI N18 P Camera Management J 5 Aum 9536 5 Click under each node to expand and view the details Similarly repeat the step 4 to add more column headers To remove the column headers from the Grouped By area Drag the required columns from the Grouped By area and drop into the actual header area To filter the video inputs s columns by defining the value 1 Click the Configurato
189. ficcess Deployment Image Servicing and Management tool Version 6 2 9208 16384 Image Version 6 2 9200 16384 feature The operation completed successful iC ilindows s ystem32 gt MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 33 SETTING UP THE CLIENT AND THE SERVER COMPUTERS rating Windows NET 35 This page is intentionally left blank 34 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW This chapter describes the procedures for installing MAXPRO VMS R310 software Follow the appropriate section in this chapter to complete the software installation BEFORE YOU BEGIN Ensure that 1 Sigo e up the client and server computers meet the software requirements Internet Information Services Manager IIS is installed on your computer Windows Updates are disabled UAC is disabled you have configured the user credentials which never expires in Computer Management window SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS The client and server computers must meet the following specifications OPERATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE RECORDERS Few of the recorders run only on specific operating systems Before installing the device Table 2 1 Software Specifications Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Professional 64 Bit and 32 Bit and Windows 8 1 OS for MAXPRO VMS Workstation Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard Edition
190. for more information To associate partition to the role 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand the User Management branch in the navigation area and then click Roles The Roles screen appears in the display area Double click the role you want to associate The General Settings screen appears 4 Click the Partitions tab The screen displays the associated partitions if any MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 229 230 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Roles TR exe TR Roe x pem 11902 62125 AM Figure 4 52 Roles Partitions 5 Click Associate The Select Partitions dialog box appears 6 Select the check box corresponding to the partition name you want to associate 7 Click OK To disassociate partitions from the role e Select the check box corresponding to the partition name and then click Remove ASSOCIATING WORKSTATIONS TO THE ROLES You can associate client workstations to roles to enable a user associated to the role to log on to MAXPRO VMS user interface and perform various actions Before you begin e Workstation Adding a Workstation for more information To associate workstations to the role 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand the User Management branch in the navigation area and then click Roles The Roles screen appears in the display area Double click the role you want to associate The General Settings screen appears Click
191. for the Encoder Name Encoder A Attributes are available only for certain events These events can be associated to a analytics multiple times The event attributes are listed in the details of the alarm in Alarm window To view the event attributes of an alarm right click the alarm and then click Show Details To associate events to a analytics 1 Click the Events tab The screen displays the associated events if any 2 Click Associate The Select Available Events dialog box appears 3 Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to associate 4 Click OK To disassociate events from a analytics e Select the check box corresponding to the event and then click Remove To add Event Groups to events 1 Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to add the Event Group 2 Double click on the Event Group box Select Event Groups dialog box appears 3 Click the check box corresponding to the Event Group you want to add 4 Click OK To disassociate events from a analytics e Select the check box corresponding to the event and then click Remove Note You need to add an event group before you associate it to an event See Adding an Event Group for more information To disable an event 1 Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to disable 2 Click the Disabled box A drop down list is enabled MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 239 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND
192. for the IP Engine appear 4 Click the Advance Settings tab The advance settings for the IP Engine appear 5 Click the Audit Log tab 6 Inthe Keep audit events for box select the length of time for which the audit logs must be saved in the IP Engine database MANAGING Disk SPACE FOR IP ENGINE The IP Engine can be configured to raise alarms start deleting video clips automatically or stop recording onto a disk when the free space drops below the configured minimum levels Even after you have configured disk space settings the disk can still run out of space if e The rate at which recordings are being made is greater than the rate at which old recordings are being deleted e Noclips suitable for automatic deletion can be found on the disk 92 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP SITE Recorders If you configure the deletion threshold at a value larger than the volume of the disk the IP Engine disables automatic clip deletion for that disk An alarm is raised to notify the operator that automatic clip deletion is disabled for the disk The IP Engine raises an alarm when there is a need for automatic clip deletion on a disk Alarms are raised each time the IP Engine begins automatic clip deletion This is followed by alarms raised every ten minutes until the available disk space exceeds the configured automatic clip deletion value If the amount of free disk space is ne
193. g Object count Object count Zone information Zone information Object type Object type Person entered restricted zone Zone information Zone information Person exited restricted zone Zone information Zone information Person loitering in restricted zone Zone information Zone information Staying in target zone Object type Object type Zone information Zone information MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs Events Event Attribute Description Attributes Object trespassing Object type Object type line Zone information Zone information Person trespassing line Zone information Zone information Car trespassing line Zone information Zone information Object started moving in wrong Object type Object type Zone information Zone information direction Object stopped Object type Object type moving in wrong A Zone information Zone information irection Person started moving in wrong direction Zone information Zone information Person stopped moving in wrong direction Zone information Zone information Car started moving in wrong direction Zone information Zone information Person on fence line Zone information Zone information Car made an illegal U turn Zone informat
194. g automatically deleted The duration commences at the clip s end date and time Send video to If selected video is automatically shown in station the specified Station s when motion is detected If a Station has an alarm monitor the video is displayed on the alarm monitor Station number The number of the Station that the video is sent to if you select the Send video to Station s check box All stations in area The area containing the Stations that the video is sent to if you select the Send video to Station s check box OBJ ECT TRACKING AND CLASSIFICATION SETTINGS Configuring object tracking and classification involves defining one or more Regions of Interest rectangles or polygons in the field of view and then tuning the operation of the associated tracking algorithm within those regions In addition to defining the ROI you must define e minimum size of the object to be tracked e The condition that an object must meet for each region of interest before the network recorder takes the specified action such as raising an alarm or starting a recording MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs Before you begin Configure the camera settings See Adding a Camera for more information Associate the recorders See Associating Recorder to a Video Input Device for more information To co
195. ge is 1 99 015 the default value which indicates no camera view is to be selected Note As the view number 0 is used for indicating that NO VIEW is specified view 0 can NOT be recalled by this field Alternate Camera 3 Define the third alternate camera to be selected when the ALT key is pressed again after selecting alternate camera 2 The range of valid camera numbers is 1 9999 The alternate camera 3 has to be defined elsewhere in the video input table A value of 0 is the default value and indicates no alternate camera is defined MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 253 254 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Logical Camera Features Alternate View Description When Alternate Camera 3 is selected it can automatically move to the designated View preset position The valid camera views range is 1 99 0 is the default value which indicates no camera view is to be selected Note As the view number 0 is used for indicating that NO VIEW is specified view 0 cannot be recalled by this field Alternate Camera 4 This field defines the fourth alternate camera to be selected when the ALT key is pressed again after selecting alternate camera 3 The range of valid camera numbers is 1 9999 The alternate camera 4 would have to be defined elsewhere in the video input table A value of 0 is the default value and indicates no alternate camera is defined
196. guration of MAXPRO VMS for information on how to perform the verification MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 15 COMMISSIONING PLAN BERE Steps in the Commissioning Process This page is intentionally left blank 16 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide SETTING UP THE CLIENT AND THE SERVER COMPUTERS OVERVIEW Setting up the server and client computers is the first phase in the commissioning process BEFORE YOU BEGIN Determine the following at the location e Number of server and client computers e Hardware configuration of the computers e Number of serial devices such as joystick controllers Ultrakey keyboard switchers PITS and other devices TASKS TO PERFORM IN THIS PHASE The following table lists the activities that are performed in this phase Tasks See the section Specifications for virtual server solution Virtual Machine Specifications Ensure that the hardware configuration of Hardware Specifications the server and client computers meet the minimum specifications Connect the monitors keyboard and mouse Configuring the Monitor Display to the server and client computers Properties Configure the monitor display properties Configuring the Monitor Display Properties Install the serial expander in the server to About Serial Expander connect serial devices MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 17 2 SETTING UP THE
197. gure 4 40 Contact Group 204 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP SITE Contact Group 3 Click Add The settings for the contact group appears Beert 19 IP Camera Management 3 senes Figure 4 41 Adding a Contact Group 4 Inthe Group Name box type the name for the group In the Description box type a description for the contact group 6 Inthe Associate Users section select the required role The users associated to the role are displayed in the Available Users section 7 Inthe Available Users section select the check box corresponding to the user whom you want to select and then click or click to select all the users Similarly select to deselect LL Or 8 Click Save to deselect all DELETING THE CONTACT GROUP You can delete a contact group when you no longer want to keep the contact group To delete a contact group 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand User Management in the navigation area and then click Contact Group The Contact Group screen appears in the display area 3 Select the check box corresponding to the contact group that you want to delete Click Delete A confirmation message appears on top of the display area Click Yes UPDATING THE CONTACT GROUP You can update a contact group to change the users and roles for a contact group To update a contact group 1 Click the Configurator tab
198. h 83 ADDING ANALYTICS G0 a omen awed we Rb dowel dae were 83 ADDING RECORDERS o pare Reo RE Ra EEN ERE wkd ates ee PR 83 ADDING SWITCHERS Gp Pb ahd SAG Maw aS Wee AS oe 83 ADDING VIDEO INPUTS ee a ee d uia Agoda 83 ADDING VIDEO OUTPUTS 06 ccc cee ee eee 83 ADDING RELAYS 2 che Rhine Bde swe wee ee wee hh wld eS eld eee 83 ADDING ALARM INPUTS bees wb stews ed eue wo pode we ob daw 83 ADDING LOGICAL CAMERAS 0 0 ccc has 84 ADDING SEQUENCES r icio EOS SIS eee eh Ee ea ee 84 ADDING SYSTEM MACROS lees eee hrs 84 ADDING JOYSTICK CONTROLLERS sese 84 ADDING INTERCEPT KEYS eers cereiro bed eg bed by Eee Rubr dots Wd des EUER ek ee 84 MIeisisp UBN cH 84 RECORDERS dede oko debate aud S Dane a qub skeen a dead 85 ADDING A RECORDER hd RR dag wis ba E ub gebe y ORO oe WE ee 85 ADVANCED SETTINGS FOR IP ENGINE sees 92 DISCOVERING DEVICES isr esor rhe 95 MAXPRO VMS R310 Table of Contents ASSOCIATING PARTITIONS TO THE eee nas 99 ASSOCIATING EVENTS AND EVENT ATTRIBUTES TO A RECORDER 100 FILTERING AND GROUPING THE RECORDERS 0 00 cece eee ehh 110 SORTING RECORDER
199. h network traffic MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 19 SETTING UP THE CLIENT AND THE SERVER COMPUTERS TE reniware Specifications HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS The MAXPRO VMS server and client computers must meet the minimum hardware specifications This is necessary for proper and efficient working of the MAXPRO VMS There are two types of hardware configurations for the server and client namely standard and performance The standard configuration uses the minimum hardware specifications The performance configuration uses higher hardware specifications for better performance The performance configuration is also recommended for compatibility with features that are going to be provided in MAXPRO VMS in the near future Table 2 1 MAXPRO VMS Server Standard Spec with Windows 2008 Server R2 64 bit Windows 2012 up to 5 Clients 20 Specification Description Write is required if workstation is used for exporting recordings Processor Single Intel amp Quad Core Xeon E3 1224V3 3 2 GHz Recommended Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 and 2012 Operating System 32 amp 64 bit Recommended Server dual power supply suggested Computer Type Server or Workstation Recommended System 8 GB Memory RAM DVD Drive RW Read DVD RW Disk Two separate hard drives or two sets of RAID arrays Disk RAID set 1 utilizes 1OK RPM SATA 150GB or 10K 15K RPM SCSI 146GB for Windows operating sy
200. h as the Axis 241S SA Axis 241Q QA and Axis 2400 might need to be downloaded from the Axis Web site e VCL Orbiter Gold e VCL Orbiter Lite Note Selecting a control type other than fixed causes the PTZ settings to appear in the display area 4 Configure the PTZ settings The following table lists the PTZ settings Settings Pan speed Tilt speed Zoom speed Focus speed Iris speed Description Only applicable to the PTZ live video controls and indicators These properties appear only if they are appropriate to the selected Camera Control Type They specify the speed at which a user can change the camera s movement or focus The values range between 0 and 100 The larger the value the faster the camera movement focus changes You need to optimize these values by testing the camera s operation Continuous Pan Tilt speed The speed of the mouse and joystick controls A higher speed results in the mouse or joystick shifting the camera s pan and tilt faster Camera hardware ID Identifies the camera on a multi dropped cable This must correspond to the value configured on the PTZ head Only applicable to Honeywell KD6 Pelco and Honeywell KD6 VCL Pelco Dome Camera Control Type and VCL 5 Inthe Home Preset Tour box select the required tour Return to Home Preset box is enabled 6 Inthe Return to Home Preset box type a time in seconds to perform a tour and return
201. hat corresponds to the feature that you are installing Complete Installation or Custom Installation MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 43 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE TO 4 Table 2 2 Select Features to Install Complete Installation Installs MAXPRO VMS Server MAXPRO VMS Client MAXPRO VMS Scheduler MAXPRO VMS Trinity Framework Device drivers Adapters and Analytics Sever and Client See Complete Installation Custom Installation Helps you to choose between MAXPRO VMS Server MAXPRO VMS Client and Analytics Sever and Client See Custom Installation Note Choosing the Custom Installation option can save the installation time by eliminating the installation of any unnecessary modules 44 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Complete Installation COMPLETE INSTALLATION Ce ee sd Complete installation can be selected when you are operating MAXPRO VMS R310 from a location that consists of all the Drivers Switchers and Analytics Servers Complete installation requires computers with performance configuration BEFORE YOU BEGIN Complete installation can be done to e Server and Client Install Video Analytics Server 1 Perform steps 1 through 13 of How to Install MAXPRO VMS select Complete Installation in the Installation Type dialog box and then click Next Click Next The Database Server Login dialog box app
202. he Choose the COM Port drop down list select the required port See also Configuring Switchers See Configuring Switchers for more information 180 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Switchers 10 Associate Partition See Associating Partitions to Switcher for more information 11 Associate Events See Associating Events to Switcher for more information 12 Click Save CONFIGURING SWITCHERS This section details the sequential procedure to configure the switchers that are supported by MAXPRO VMS Before you begin e Add a Serial Port e Configuring the Switcher 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Server in the navigation area and then click Serial Ports The Serial Ports screen appears in the display area 3 Click Add A Joystick screen appears Refer to the instructions in the table to configure the port for various switchers Switchers Vicon Instructions In the COM Port Number type the reference number of the serial port In the Port Name type a name for the port In the Port Type drop down list select the port type as NONE In the Baud Rate drop down list select 9600 In the Data Bit drop down list select EIGHT In the Stop Bit drop down list select ONE In the Parity drop down list select NONE Burle In the COM Port Number type the reference number of the serial port In the Port Name type a name for the port
203. he options 12 In the Device Macro Flags area select the check boxes to set and test from within the macro environment 13 Click Save MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP SITE Switchers SWITCHERS Switcher routes multiple analog camera inputs to multiple analog monitor outputs SWITCHERS AND PARTITIONS A partition is a logical grouping of video devices Partitions are associated to switchers You can restrict a non associated user of the partition from viewing or changing the settings of the switcher SWITCHERS AND EVENTS Events are predefined actions Switchers have predefined events by default An alarm is triggered whenever an event is generated For example when a switcher is disconnected an event Connection lost is generated ADDING A SWITCHER You can add a switcher to route video input analog camera to a video output analog monitor Before you begin e Add Site See Adding a Site for more information e Add Partition See Adding a Partition for more information e Add Event Groups See Adding an Event Group for more information Add Serial Ports See Adding a Serial Port for more information By default a site partition and event groups are available You can associate the switcher to them or create new To add a switcher 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Devices in the navigation area and then click Switchers The Swit
204. he same area Note For more information on how to associate camera and how to view video from a group of related cameras refer to the MAXPRO VMS R310 Help MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 317 VERIFYING THE CONFIGURATION VMS BEEN Checking the Saving the Salvo Layout using the Salvo View Feature CHECKING THE SAVING THE SALVO LAYOUT USING THE SALVO VIEW FEATURE Ce ee A salvo layout that is customized based on the preferences of the operators is referred to as a salvo view Cameras and sequences that are selected frequently and the preferred salvo layout can be saved as a salvo view The saved salvo views appear in the Views window Note For more information on how to create select and manage salvo views refer to the MAXPRO VMS R310 Help 318 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide VERIFYING THE CONFIGURATION OF MAXPRO VMS Checking the Device Listing in My Devices Window CHECKING THE DEVICE LISTING IN My DEVICES WINDOW In the My Devices window operators can group the video sources which are frequently selected such as cameras monitors and sequences If you group the video sources it is easy to select and you need not search in the Devices window which generally consists of many video sources You can also group the devices under shared devices Devices grouped under shared devices are displayed on all client workstations irrespective of the logged in user
205. here the text insertion Slot card resides Note The valid range of slot numbers is 1 32 HD Series hardware supports the MX208 8 channel video output text insertion card the text inserter slot entries correspond with the physical video output channel of the subrack For VideoBloxsubrack this number represents the physical input location of the video output channel Valid range 1 to 255 for VideoBlox 12 13 14 Click the Net Device option and then type the exact location and reference for the video Select the LINK check box if you want to broadcast the status changes and actions performed on the current video output device on the network In the Video Timeout box type the display time out period The display time out period can be set from 1 999 seconds Enter a value zero if this function is not required MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 167 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE TO video oupit 15 In the Text Line Settings area select the check boxes according to your requirement to select text line settings The following table lists the options Option Description Message Line Defines the line where the Message Line text Example Warning message is displayed Mode Line Defines the line where the Mode text Example Scan mode is displayed Source Description Defines the line the Video Input device description is displayed Channel Description Defi
206. iating Events and Event Attributes to Analytics for more information To disassociate cameras from analytics 1 2 238 In the List of Cameras configured under section select the camera that you want to disassociate Click Disassociate Cameras MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Analytics Setting alarm filter threshold 1 From the Alarm filter threshold drop down list select a severity level for the alarm threshold Note This severity level is applicable only for Analytics alarms If alarm threshold value is 4 then the events with severity level less than 4 are not stored in the Trinity database However you can view these events using the ActiveEye tool ASSOCIATING EVENTS AND EVENT ATTRIBUTES TO ANALYTICS You can associate one or more events to a analytics server An alarm is triggered whenever any of the associated event occurs for the analytics server For certain events you can also associate event attributes For example for an Encoder Disabled event you can associate attributes such as Encoder Name Encoder ID and so on For every attribute that you associate you can set a value based on which the event is triggered In the above example you can associate the attribute Encoder Name to the event and set its value as Encoder A When this event is associated to the video input an alarm is raised when the event Encoder Disabled occurs
207. ical Camera General Settings 4 Inthe Group ID box type the unique ID 5 Inthe Group Name box type a name for the logical group 6 Inthe Intercept Key box type a kicked number to select the group Note Typing a number in the Intercept Key field automatically updates the Intercept Keyboard Keys table 252 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Logical Camera 7 Specify the following details in the table Features Description Selection Type a unique number within each group It defines the number Number entered by the operator to select the Primary Camera in the group There can be up to 99 different selection numbers per group Valid values are 1 9999 Primary Specify camera number that is selected when the operator selects a Camera Group and a selection number within that group Valid values are 1 9999 and must correspond to a camera number defined in the Video Inputs table Primary The primary camera can also be a PTZ camera with view recall Camera View capability In this case an actual View number can be specified Therefore selecting the group and selection number within that group not only displays the primary camera but also automatically moves it to the designated View preset position The valid camera views range is 1 99 0 is the default value which indicates no camera view is to be selected Note As the view number 0
208. ication Maintenance System Files Modification MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders Recorder Event Name Event Attribute Description Attributes Maintenance Synchronize Time Maintenance Clear Storage Maintenance Clear Stream System Runtime Failure Session Disconnected Session Connected Output Enabled RelayNumber Numeric value of the Input Number Output Disabled RelayNumber Numeric value of the Input Number ADVANCED SETTINGS Caution This tab displays only for the MAXPRO NVR recorder Configure the system settings end Holideys Exceptions for Schedules General Settings Holders E cnp sangs Sees ty confu T Chers fron Pe Device Address dun Coro Xp Seri Ports te Association User Defined Events Sica 3 e PX d Lat of A beot E IP Camera Management Email Settings eoo Series SMTP Server P scheduler fj xe Boren Netto s Figure 4 10 Advanced tab for MAXPRO NVR Recorder The configured settings for the MAXPRO NVR recorder are displayed in the following five tabs MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 109 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE e System e Camera e Schedule Do e Sequence e User You c
209. ices TCP Standard 135 File and Printer Sharing TCP Standard 139 445 TCP Standard 137 138 DNS Server TCP Standard 53 Client and Server TCP Standard 80 Communication Applications Application Description Executable File Name IP Engine Camera HWDVSCameraManager exe Service IP Engine COM Host System32ADIlHost exe Service IP Engine Event Service HWDVSEventServer exe IP Engine Integrity HWDVSDBSIntegrity exe Service IP Engine Multi HWDVSMonitoeCoOrdinator ex Monitor Coordinator Services Application Description Executable File Name IP Engine Camera HWDVSCameraManager exe Service IP Engine COM Host System32 DIlHost exe Service OTHER RECORDERS Recorder Type Port Number Name Fusion TCP Custom 4000 RapidEye TCP Custom 10000 Enterprise TCP Custom 2377 TCP Custom 2367 TCP Custom 2703 TCP Custom 1056 HRXD TCP Custom 8016 TCP Custom 10019 HRDP TCP Custom 4000 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE i Firewall Settings Recorder Port Type Port Number Name Digital Sentry TCP Custom 18772 MileStone TCP Custom 1237 MAXPRO TCP Custom 20007 TCP Custom 26026 TCP Custom 10000 CLIENT CONFIGURATION Application Name Purpose Type Port Number MMShell Exe Server Connection Custom 20007 Rendering Custom 20009 Connection Controller Cust
210. ics server 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand the Servers branch in the navigation area and then click Analytics The Analytics Servers screen appears in the display area MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 237 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE 8 aep 3 7 8 Click Add The general settings screen appears Em Meren lem Servers Figure 4 54 Analytics Server In the Server Name box type a name for the server From the Site drop down list select the required site In the Server IP box type the IP address of the server where the analytics is installed Click Ping to verify the connection The field appears in green if the IP address or the host name is valid In the Port box type the port number to connect the server Click Save To associate cameras to analytics 1 2 3 Click Associate Cameras The Select camera list dialog box appears Select the cameras that have to be associated to analytics From the Analytics package settings for the selected cameras drop down list select the required package and then click Set analytics package type Note The license information of each Honeywell Video Analytics HVA package is explained under the License Information section Click Associate Click Cancel to exit The cameras are associated and displayed in the Analytical Server page Associate Events and Events Attributes See Assoc
211. ided by Honeywell to you HONEYWELL SOFTWARE By installing copying or otherwise using the HONEYWELL SOFTWARE you agree to be bound by the terms and conditions in this Agreement If you do not agree to the terms and conditions in this Ehe terms of the license 1 Figure 3 2 License Agreement 3 Read the license agreement and then click I accept the terms of the license agreement to accept the license agreement 4 Click Next The Customer Information dialog box appears MAXPRO YMS R310 Enterprise Edition Customer Information ne and the name of the company for which Install Shield lt Back Next gt cancel Figure 3 3 Customer Information 5 Inthe Registered To box type your name 6 Inthe Company Name box type your company name MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 41 42 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE How to Install MAXPRO VMS 7 Click Next The Choose Destination Location dialog box appears MAXPRO YMS R310 Enterprise Edition Choose Destination Location setup will install MAXPRO VMS Installshield Figure 3 4 Choose Destination Location Note Honeywell recommends you to install the MAXPRO VMS R310 software in C drive By default C drive is selected Click Change to change the default destination folder and then select the path to install 8 Click Next The Validation of User Credentials dialog box appears MAXPRO MS R310 Enterprise
212. iffers on the HTTP Activation and Non HTTP Activation features Add features that are required for HTTP Activation You cannot install HTTP Activation unless the following role services or features are also installed 4 Web Server IIS 4 Web Server 4 Application Development Extensibility 3 5 4 Windows Process Activation Service NET Environment 3 5 Include management tools if applicable Figure 1 8 HTTP Activation 6 Click Add Features button Add features that are required for Non HTTP Activation You cannot install Non HTTP Activation unless the following role services or features are also installed 4 NET Framework 3 5 Features NET Framework 3 5 includes NET 2 0 and 3 0 4 Windows Process Activation Service Environment 3 5 v Include management tools if applicable Figure 1 9 Non HTIP Activation 7 Click Add Features The Select Features screen appears MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 31 32 SETTING UP THE CLIENT AND THE SERVER COMPUTERS Enabling Windows NET 3 5 8 9 DESTINATION SERVER Select features Before You Begin Select one or more features to install on the selected server Installation Type Features Server Selection NET Framework 3 5 combines the NET Framework 3 5 Features 4 Eva rie Ln power of the NET Framework 2 0 Server Roles NET Frame
213. in the display area fVeoDutputs x 1 Total Record Court 1 Update Adminstrator 1 S NENNEN 0 o Figure 4 27 Video Outputs 3 Click Add The Monitor screen appears by default Dita Monitor Zaho Vom Soren Figure 4 28 Monitors 4 From the Device Type drop down list select the required device type The currently supported video output device types are listed in the following table Click the corresponding links in the device column list to refer to the instructions while adding Video Input Description Device Monitor For details on configuring the monitor see Adding Monitors MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 165 166 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP SITE Video Outputs Video Input Description Device Standard Device For details on configuring the devices see Adding a Video S t Devi Output Device Standard Device Smart Device VCR BEES Standby VCR VCR Standby VCR Trunk For details on configuring the trunk see Adding a Video Output Device Trunk Digital OutputTrunk For details on configuring the digital output trunk see Adding a Video Output Device Digital Output Trunk Associate Partition See Associating Partitions to Video Outputs for more information Associate Joystick Controllers See Associating Video Outputs to Joystick Controllers
214. indicated in white color For cameras connected to other recorders such as Rapid Eye Fusion Enterprise and Intellex the color codes are not displayed in the timeline However you can click a point in the timeline to play recorded video The label Rec is displayed in red color on the panel displaying recorded video from a camera MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 307 VERIFYING THE CONFIGURATION OF MAXPRO VMS Checking the Playback of Recorded Video Note For more information on how to play recorded video from the Timeline window and how to use the player controls refer to the MAXPRO VMS R310 Help 308 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide VERIFYING THE CONFIGURATION OF MAXPRO VMS Checking the Bookmark Feature CHECKING THE BOOKMARK FEATURE The bookmark feature is used for marking points of interest in a video recording Comments are added to the bookmarks and they appear as ToolTips in the timeline at marked points They are helpful while reviewing recorded video The bookmarks can be cut or copied and pasted at different points in the timeline Operators can selectively view video by browsing from one bookmark to another in a timeline The following figure illustrates bookmarks added to the timeline Bookmarks in the Timeline Figure 5 4 Bookmarks Note For more information on how to add edit cut copy paste and delete bookmarks and on how to browse between bookmarks ref
215. intercept keys to them For example a key can be programmed to select a panel in the salvo layout J OYSTICK CONTROLLERS AND VIDEO OUTPUTS Joystick controllers are associated to video outputs in MAXPRO VMS CONFIGURING J OYSTICK CONTROLLER To enable the joystick controller on the MAXPRO VMS you need to configure the joystick controller To configure the joystick controller 1 Press ALT Home in Joystick Controller The STARTUP Menu of the configuration page appears On the STARTUP MENU screen press Configure The Numeric Entry screen appears 3 In the Enter Your Password box type the password and then press Enter The Configuration screen appears 4 Press HardwareConfig The HARDWARE CONFIG screen appears 5 Press Port Settings The PORT SETUP screen appears 6 Press Ethernet The ETHERNET SETUP screen appears 7 Press IP Address and then type the IP Address of the Joystick Controller 8 Press Subnet Mask and then type the Subnet Mask of the network 9 Press Default Gateway select the required Gateway 10 Press Sys Cntl IP Address and then type the IP address of the MAXPROTM VMS Server 11 Press Save 12 Press Quit to return to the STARTUP Menu screen 13 In the STARTUP Menu press Run CONNECTING THE KEYBOARD TO MAXPRO VMS To connect a keyboard to MAXPRO VMS MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 175 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE 1 Go to C Program Files Honeyw
216. ion Zone information Car pulled off the road Zone information Zone information Person running in the wrong direction Zone information Zone information Person started running Zone information Zone information Person stopped running Zone information Zone information Car needs assistance Zone information Zone information Object entered Object type Object type Zone information Zone information Object exited Object type Object type Zone information Zone information Object stopped Object type Object type Zone information Zone information Object started moving Object type Object type Zone information Zone information MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 153 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE vere mts Events Event Attribute Description Attributes Object merged Object type Object type Zone information Zone information Objects split Object type Object type Zone information Zone information People passed by Object type Object type Zone information Zone information Object entered Object type Object type sterile zone 7 F Zone information Zone information Car entered sterile Zone information Zone information zone Person entered Zone information Zone information sterile zone ASSOCIATING PARTITIONS TO VIDEO INPUTS You can associate pa
217. ion area and then click Users The Users screen appears in the display area Click Discover The User Discovery Details screen appears In the Domain Workgroup drop down list select the domain or workgroup In the Name Filter box type the name which you want to discover Note If you want to search more than one name belonging to the same category type the full name or partial name succeeded by a and then click Query For example to search users who have their first name as John type John or Joh and then click Query 6 Click Query The results are displayed in the Results section The users who are not added to MAXPRO VMS are listed in green color 7 Select the check box corresponding to the required user 8 Inthe User Role drop down list select a role for the user 220 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Users 9 Click Import The user is added and his name is listed in red color Note You can skip step 5 if you do not want to use name filter option 10 Click Reset to restore default settings or to discover new users UPDATING A USER You can modify the settings of user to change the user ID password and enable privileges You can update user settings only if you have admin rights To update a user 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand User Management in the navigation area and then click Users The Users screen appears
218. ion detection recordings When motion is detected and a recording is started the IP engine inserts this pre record segment at the start of the recording The pre record period on the recording allows you to view what was happening immediately before the motion was detected and a recording started For example if you set this to 10 seconds the recording shows the 10 seconds of video before the recording was activated Record for The length of time in seconds the recording takes place after motion is detected If you select Until motion finishes the recording continues until no motion is detected in the scene for the length of time specified in the Consider motion finished after property MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 141 142 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs Settings Description Record frame rate The frame rate at which video is recorded for motion detection recordings Archive after The period for which a motion detection recording is available for playback before being archived The duration commences at the video clip s end date and time If set this must be less than the Delete after period Delete after The duration for which motion detection recordings are stored before being automatically deleted The duration commences at the video clip s end date and time Send video to station s If selected video is automatically sho
219. ioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Logical Camera DELETING A LOGICAL CAMERA To delete logical camera 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Groups in the navigation area and then click Logical Camera The Group screen appears in the display area Select the check box corresponding to the logical camera that you want to delete 4 Click Delete A confirmation message appears on top of the display area Click Yes UPDATING LOGICAL CAMERAS You can update logical cameras to change the group name or the alternative camera To update logical cameras 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Groups in the navigation area and then click Logical Camera The Group screen appears in the display area Select the check box corresponding to the logical camera you want to update 4 Click Update The general settings for the logical camera appear You can modify the settings according to your needs MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 255 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE SYSTEM MACROS A macro is a rule or pattern that specifies how a certain input sequence often a sequence of characters is mapped to an output sequence or action ADDING A SYSTEM MACRO You can add a macro to enter a single character or a word to perform a series of actions To add a system macro 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Groups in the navigation area and then click System Mac
220. ioning and Installation Guide UPGRADING TO VMS R310 Upgrading MAXPRO VMS R300 to MAXPRO VMS R310 Note confirmation message is displayed as shown below Click Yes to proceed and to install the list of prerequisites 7 Setup has detected that listed Pre Requisites are not installed in your system Click Yes to proceed and the Pre Requisites will be installed or Click No to install the Pre Requisites 12 Click Next The set up status of various components appears After the components are Upgrade Complete dialog box appears MAXPRO MS R310 Enterprise Edition Upgrade Complete Installed Figure 6 6 Upgrade Complete 13 Click Finish You are prompted to reboot the computer to complete installation MAXPRO MS R310 System requires 4 reboot Please save all the unsaved data before rebooting the system Figure 6 7 Prompt for Rebooting 14 Click OK MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 329 ID upgrading MAIPRO VMS R240 To MAXPRO VMS R300 UPGRADING MAXPRO VMS R240 To MAXPRO VMS R300 Refer to MAXPRO VMS R300 Commissioning and Installation Guide to upgrade VMS R240 To MAXPRO VMS R300 330 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide Honeywell Video Systems Head Office 2700 Blankenbaker Pkwy Suite 150 Louisville KY 40299 USA www honeywellvideo com 1 800 796 2288 Honeywell Security Australia Pty Ltd Unit 5 Riverside
221. is 1000 MB This value must be less than the automatic clip deletion alarm value Start recording again when free disk space reaches The minimum free disk space required to start recording The IP Engine resumes recording after having stopped due to insufficient disk space Stop recording when free disk space reaches The recording stops if the minimum free disk space falls below this value Minimum value is 1000 MB This value must be less than the start recording again value MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 93 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE You can view the disk space details in the Disk Usage table The following table defines the labels in the table Label Description Directory The folder in which video clips are stored DVM Clips If selected video clips are automatically deleted when the free GB space on the disk falls below the specified value Minimum value is 1000 MB This value must be less than the low disk space alarm value Free space GB The remaining free disk space expressed in GB Free space The remaining free disk space expressed in Hourly usage Indicates the rate at which video is being stored on the disk The MB hr value is shown based on the usage rate for the minute before you called up the display or since you last clicked Refresh Disk Health Indicates the disk s health The options are OK or Fault indica
222. is used for indicating that NO VIEW is specified view 0 can NOT be recalled by this field Alternate Camera 1 This field defines the first alternate camera to be selected when the ALT key is pressed This camera is also selected by pressing the key on the keyboard after the primary camera has been selected or the key after the Alternate Camera 2 has been selected The range of valid camera numbers is 1 9999 The alternate camera would have to be defined elsewhere in the video input table A value of 0 is the default value and indicates no alternate camera is defined Alternate Camera View When Alternate Camera 1 is selected it can automatically move to the designated View preset position The valid camera views range is 1 99 0 1s the default value which indicates no camera view is to be selected Note As the view number 0 is used for indicating that NO VIEW is specified view 0 can NOT be recalled by this field Alternate Camera 2 Define the second alternate camera to be selected when the ALT key is pressed again after selecting alternate camera 1 The range of valid camera numbers is 1 9999 The alternate camera 2 must be defined elsewhere in the video input table A value of 0 is the default value and indicates no alternate camera is defined Alternate View When Alternate Camera 2 is selected it can automatically move to the designated View preset position The valid camera views ran
223. k Select All if you want all the output bits to be controlled by a single relay 7 Click Save Note Steps 3 through 9 are required only when you are connecting to Enterprise recorder CONNECTING THE RELAY TO KEYBOARD To connect relay to a keyboard 1 From the Keyboard drop down list select the required joystick controller The Device Settings appear Note In the SubrackID box the Subrack ID number where the relay module resides is displayed automatically The valid range is 1 99 If a high level or mimic panel output is used the number is prefixed with an H If a keyboard output is used the number is prefixed with a For VideoBlox subrack this represents the V communication port number to which the VideoBlox alarm concentrator AVBPIT is connected Valid range is V maximum communication ports 2 Inthe Output Bit section select the required output that needs to be controlled by the relay Each relay can control one or more output bits Click Select if you want all the output bits to be controlled by a single relay 192 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Relays Note In the Subrack Slot the slot number within the control subrack where the control output module resides is displayed automatically The valid slot numbers are 1 32 for I O and combination video I O subracks and 1 for HD Series subracks For VideoBlox subr
224. k System Macros The System Macros screen appears in the display area Select the check box corresponding to the system macros you want to delete Click Delete A confirmation message appears on top of the display area Click Yes to remove the system macro MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 257 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE RECORDER GROUPS Recorder group feature distributes the load on a controller It allows you to create different groups and associate recorders to it Associating recorders to the groups enables the load is distributed among the recorder controllers You can add update and delete recorders in a specific group Based on the load you can create maximum number of groups and associate recorder to each group By default five groups are displayed ASSOCIATING RECORDER TO RECORDER GROUPS To associate recorder to recorder groups 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand the Servers branch in the navigation area and then click Recorder Group The Recorder Group screen appears in the display area with default recorder groups wy Recorder Groups X AAA painin Delete Recorder Grap Figure 4 61 Recorder Group Screen 3 Click Add The General settings screen for Recorder Group displays 258 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorder Groups _ md Recorder Grow 7 X Reccrder Group Se
225. larm State Global Event ID and the Event attributes Freeze Select this option if you no longer wish to receive alarms Receive Alarms Only Select this option if you want to receive only alarms Receive Events Only Select this option if you want to receive only Events Receive both Alarms and Events Select this option receive both alarms and events Note For more information on how to acknowledge and clear alarms refer to the MAXPRO VMS R310 Help MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 313 VERIFYING THE CONFIGURATION OF MAXPRO VMS ID Checking for the Creation of Images CHECKING FOR THE CREATION OF IMAGES 6060609000000959990690600606000000000 0805705708 amp 00000000090598590069000000000909999999999 A frame of video displayed in the panel can be saved as an image The image can be saved in Bitmapped Graphics BMP Joint Photographic Experts Group JPG format Portable Graphics format PNG and Graphics Interchange Format GIF Only the images saved in the ImagesAndClips folder at the location in the hard drive in which MAXPRO VMS files are installed can be viewed in the Image Clip window You can double click the image view option in the Image Clip window to view images on the salvo layout You can also select the image size large medium and small as per the requirement For example X ProgramFiles Honeywell Trinity Framework ImagesAndClips Here X is the disk drive The following figure illustra
226. lation DVDs Caution You own the full responsibility for the virtual solution computer 18 hardware and operating system compatibility Honeywell is only responsible for the MAXPRO VMS software application and Honeywell installed subsystem components VMware ESXi qualification is for the MAXPRO VMS server only The MAXPRO VMS client is not supported in a virtual environment MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide SETTING UP THE CLIENT AND THE SERVER COMPUTERS Virtual Machine Specifications USEFUL TIPS Here are some of the tips that help in setting up the virtual machine environment MAXPRO VMS includes SQL Server 2012 R2 Express based on prerequisites as default and supports SQL Server 2012 R2 The end customer has to provide install and maintain updates to McAfee or Symantec Antivirus Software Turn off the Microsoft automatic updates option Always perform a full system backup prior to applying any of the tested Microsoft hot fixes Follow the VMware ESXi best practices for configuring ESXi hosts and minimize SCSI Reservation delays To support 64 bit virtual machines support for hardware virtualization Intel VT x must be enabled on x64 CPUs on the Physical ESXi Host Server Place the management network and virtual machine networks on different physical network cards Dedicated Gigabit Ethernet cards for virtual machines such as Intel PRO 1000 adapters improve throughput to virtual machines with hig
227. le for a user Privileges Viewer Description Viewer Access To restrict access to viewer tab Site View To view sites Alarm To view alarms ImageClipTreeVie w To view image clip tree Message Box To view message box MyDevices To view MyDevices Shared Devices Permission To view and restrict shared devices KeyboardUtility To access virtual keyboard Store Pre shots To store pre shots Reloading Device Connections To reload the device connections View Update License To view or update license Tris Access To access iris of the camera Focus Access To access focus access of the camera Monitors To view monitors Sequences To view sequences Salvo Views To view salvo Add My Salvo View To add my salvo view Modify My Salvo View To modify my salvo view Delete My Salvo View To delete my salvo view Add Shared Salvo View To add shared salvo view Modify Shared Salvo View To modify shared salvo view 210 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Users Privileges Description Delete Shared Delete Shared Salvo View Salvo View Add or update To add or update surrounding camera Surrounding Camera
228. lect SEVEN e Inthe Stop Bit drop down list select ONE Inthe Parity drop down list select an even parity VideoBlox Inthe COM Port Number type the reference number of the serial port nthe Port Name type a name for the port Inthe Port Type drop down list select the port type as NONE In the Baud Rate drop down list select 19200 e In the Data Bit drop down list select EIGHT e In the Stop Bit drop down list select ONE In the Parity drop down list select NONE 4 Click Save Note For more information on adding serial ports see Adding a Serial Port section ADDING A SWITCHER To add a switcher 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Devices in the navigation area and then click Switchers The Switchers screen appears in the display area 3 Click Add A Switcher screen appears 4 Inthe Switcher Type drop down list select the required switcher MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP SITE Switchers Note For more details on adding a switcher see Adding a Switcher section ADDING A CAMERA AND ASSOCIATING A SWITCHER To add a camera and associate a switcher 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Devices in the navigation area and then click Cameras The Cameras screen appears in the display area Click Save 4 Click Add A Camera screen appears In the Connected to area click Switcher The Switcher drop down list
229. leges to the user role Before you begin e Add Workstations See Adding a Workstation for more information e Add Partition See Adding a Partition for more information By default a partition and a workstation are available You can associate a role to them or create new To add a role 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand User Management in the navigation area and then click Roles The Roles screen appears in the display area 222 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Roles 0 Sven Cee ELE Alans 11974 62023 Figure 4 50 Roles 3 Click Add The General Settings tab appears EFR PRR TR Roes TE Roes x General gt tions Worketations Role s ses E Dawn ir Conewetiens Lance Atenas s 2 44 svo ve eres My Salvo Vn SE Send Pers Jose Savo view Shared Sako V E Deny aa Figure 4 51 Roles General Settings 4 Inthe Name box type a name for the role 5 Inthe Associated User area the user associated with the role is displayed Note User is displayed only when
230. les See Schedules for more information Note Changing from Scheduled to Continuous deletes all video analytics schedules for the camera The default is Continuous Click Start tuning Use the ROI to define one or more regions See Defining Regions of Interest for more information 7 Usethe tuning properties to set motion detection frame rate and sensitivity Check if the algorithm is operating as required Tuning the algorithm s operation is typically an iterative task you may have to change the values several times before you achieve satisfactory results See Tuning Properties for more information When satisfactory results are obtained click Finish tuning Configure the When motion is detected properties as required See When Motion is Detected Properties for more information 10 Click Save DEFINING REGIONS OF INTEREST To define a rectangular region of interest 1 Click and drag the pointer diagonally over the area that you want the IP engine to track and classify objects As you drag a box marks the region of interest To define an irregular region of interest 1 Move the pointer to the location of the first vertex and then click to mark its location 2 Dragthe mouse pointer to the place you want to add the next vertex and release the mouse button 3 Click and drag the mouse pointer to the place you want to add the next vertex and release the mouse button 4 Repeat step 3 for each of the othe
231. lity Events Events Events Services Performance Services Performance BPA results Performance BPA results Figure 1 3 Server Manager Window MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide SETTING UP THE CLIENT AND THE SERVER COMPUTERS Enabling Windows NET 3 5 The Add Roles and Features Wizard appears DESTINATION SERVER Before you begin WIN KHMQOSE28HS This wizard helps you install roles role services or features You determine which roles role services or features to install based on the computing needs of your organization such as sharing documents or Installation Type hosting a website Server Selection x To remove roles role services or features Start the Remove Roles and Features Wizard Before you continue verify that the following tasks have been completed The Administrator account has a strong password Network settings such as static IP addresses are configured The most current security updates from Windows Update are installed If you must verify that any of the preceding prerequisites have been completed close the wizard complete the steps and then run the wizard again To continue click Next Skip this page by default Previous Install Cancel Figure 1 4 Add Roles and Features Wizard 2 Click Next The Add Role and Features Wizard appears DESTINATION SERVER Select installation type WIN KHMQOSE23H5 Before You Begin Select the installation type
232. ll Utility window appears and displays the progress of cleaning ESI MAXPRO YMS Uninstall Utility Executing MasterRemoval E ADDING THE RIGHTS TO THE LOCAL ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT After installing the SQL 2008 Express the Installation fails to start the SOL service on Windows 2008 R2 machine The following error message is displayed in the Event viewer FileMgr StartLogFiles Operating system error 2 The system cannot find the file specified occurred while creating or opening file e sql10_main_t obj x86fre sql mkmastr databases objfre i386 MSDBLog ldf Diagnose and correct the operating system error and retry the operation MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 73 INSTALLING THE VMS R310 SOFTWARE Cause This issue is by design and occurs because of the account that is running SQL Server Setup does not have one or all of the following rights e The right to back up files and directories e The right to manage auditing and the security log and e The right to debug programs Resolution The Setup user account requires the above default user rights for the Setup to be completed successfully To add the rights to the local administrator account 1 Logon to the computer as an administrator Click Start gt Run the Run command window appears Type Control admintools and then click OK Double click Local Security Policy the Local Security Settings dialog box appea
233. lor Correction Allow user to perform color correction Flip Allow user to flip a video Mirror Allow user to mirror view a video Preview Allow user to preview a video MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP SITE Roles Privileges Description Remove Text Overlay Allow user to remove text overlay Analytics Add Analytics server To add analytics server Update Analytics To update analytics server server Delete Analytics To delete analytics server server Launch HVA To launch HVA configurator Configurator Launch HVA Live To launch HVA Live Monitor Monitor Reports and Forsenics To access the reports and forsenics Enable Analytics To allow user to enable the analytics option for camera Option for Camera Note To enable all the privileges select the Allow check box and to deny all the privileges select the Deny check box 7 Associate Partitions See Associating Partitions to the Roles for more information 8 Associate Workstations Associating Workstations to the Roles for more information 9 Click Save ASSOCIATING PARTITIONS TO THE ROLES You can associate partitions to roles Associating partitions to a role enables a user to perform video surveillance tasks for all the video devices that are grouped in the partition Before you begin e Add a Partition See Adding a Partition
234. ls Settings Event Description Description Type a description for the event Start Macro Type an alarm start macro When an alarm condition is detected for an alarm input the alarm start macro is executed Finish Macro Type an alarm finish macro When a detected alarm input returns to its normal state the alarm finish macro is executed Global ID Type a unique global ID If the Global Event ID is not assigned MAXPRO VMS assigns a unique global ID automatically when you save the event settings Severity Type a severity level Note Severity level is set to trigger alarms when the threshold is met For example if the threshold is set 50 in the preferences tab an alarm is triggered when threshold becomes 51 3 the Event Groups tab select the check box corresponding to the event group that you want to associate to the alarm input and then click Associate 4 Click Save CONNECTING ALARM INPUT TO THE SWITCHER To connect alarm input to a switcher MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 199 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE 1 From the Switcher drop down list select the required switcher The switcher settings appear 2 the Advanced Settings tab specify the following details Settings Subrack ID Description Specifies the subrack ID number where the alarm input module resides The valid range is 1 99 If a high level or mimi
235. ls i site Defaut x Step 3 Give IPEngine Camera Configuration Details Camera Server and Video Details X Camera Server S Video Clip Directory Video Format PAL 5 Step 4 Add Selected Cameras to IPEngine Add Select the check box corresponding to the camera or cameras that you want to add From the Site drop down list select the required site In the Camera Server drop down list select the IP Engine Camera Server In the Video Clip Directory box type a path to store video clips In the Video Format drop down list select a format for the video Click Add on nw n5 98 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders ASSOCIATING PARTITIONS TO THE RECORDER You can associate partitions to recorder Associating a partition to a recorder restricts a non associated user of the partition from viewing the recorder or changing the settings of the recorder Before you begin e Add a Partition See Adding a Partition for more information To associate partition to a recorder 1 Click the Configurator tab Expand Devices in the navigation area Click the Recorders branch The Recorders screen appears in the display area Double click the recorder you want to associate The General Settings screen appears gt Click the Partitions tab The screen displays the associated partitions if any ea eode c
236. lt central user name in is displayed Inthe Password box the default central password pass is displayed Note The central User ID and Password information is very important for receiving events and alarms from the Milestone device and are configured in the Milestone Management Application MAXPRO NVR Inthe Unit Address box type the numeric IP address or the host name of the MAXPRO NVR recorder Click Ping to verify the connection The field appears in green if the IP address or the host name is valid e Select the Check for duplicate IP address device name in the database check boxt o check the availability of the host name e In the Search Pot box the port number appears by default Inthe Controller Port box the port number appears by default Inthe StorageEngine Port box the port number appears by default Inthe User Name box the user name appears by default Inthe Password box the password appears by default MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 89 90 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders Recorder Type MAXPRO VMS To configure the device settings In the Site Address box type the numeric IP address or the host name of the MAXPRO VMS recorder Click Ping to verify the connection The field appears in green if the IP address or the host name is valid Select the Check for duplicate IP address hostname in the database check box
237. ly changes state or is set or cleared with macros Latched Once the alarm is triggered it remains active until it is reset manually using the alarm clear option Toggle The first time the alarm is triggered it becomes active the next time it is cleared 10 In the Connected To section click one of the devices for which you want to add the alarm input The following table lists the available devices to which an Alarm Input can be connected Device Switcher Description For details on connecting a switcher see Connecting Alarm Input to the Switcher Recorder For details on connecting a recorder see Connecting Alarm Input to the Recorder 196 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Alarm Inputs Device Description Remote For details on connecting a remote camera see Connecting Alarm Input Camera to the Remote Camera Keyboard For details on connecting a keyboard see Connecting Alarm Input to the Keyboard Network For details on connecting a network see Connecting Alarm input to the Network High Level For details on connecting a high level device see Connecting Alarm Device Input to the High Level Device 11 Select the LINK check box if you want to broadcast the status changes and actions performed on the current alarm input on the network 12 Associate Partition 13 Click Sa
238. m Boot Macro Type the desired macro When the MAXPRO VMS Server receives a reset command the Warm Boot macro sequence is executed following all the normal system and equipment initialization Note Warm Boot can be initiated from MAXPRO VMS Cold Boot button in the Trinity Controller page Printer Fail Macro Type the desired macro When the MAXPRO VMS Server detects the hard copy printer is no longer online the Printer Fail Macro sequence is executed 5 Selectthe Master Network Clock check box to select this node in a networked system to be the master clock Selecting this check box ensures that once in every hour all the other network nodes have the time and date synchronized to this node s clock Note Only one network node in the system is permitted to be the master clock source 6 Select the Forward Net Broadcast check box to suppress the forwarding of incoming broadcast messages 7 Specify the settings for the following tabs 264 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Trinity Controller e Display Settings Settings Instructions Description Text Type Height The rows on the table represent the different text type and heights that can be selected for display Five 5 lines of normal height text or three 3 lines of double height text can be displayed Monitor Normal normal height text displayed on monitors
239. mera The next available IP address from the one that is entered is assigned to cameras that are selected 6 Inthe Subnet Mask box type the subnet mask for the camera In the Default Gateway box type the default gateway for the camera Click Start AUTOMATICALLY OBTAINING IP ADDRESS FOR A CAMERA To obtain an IP address 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand IP Camera Management in the navigation area and then click Equip Series The Equip Series screen appears in the display area MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 279 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE TE eu Series Camera 3 Double click the camera for which you want to obtain an IP address The general settings for the camera appear o B wiznwx x Edt network settingsiupgrade Frmeare Canary Bite 1 Connected Device settings T Obran an IP Address automaticaly Dever Noe Waen Actress 006413103404 Video Format WP Address STATIC 10 73 72 198 Subrat 265 255 264 0 DAE sit Gatan TEES Frare Product Name reat Product Version Bai 055 varen Select upgrade lie Sarvar Alarms 13016 Figure 4 74 Camera General Settings 4 Select the Obtain an IP Address automatically check box and then click Save A confirmation message appears 5 Click OK Note You can also edit the IP address subnet m
240. mmissioning and Installation Guide INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Custom Installation Note Click Browse to change the default destination folder and then select the folder where the cache files must be installed 9 Click Next The Language selection for analytics application dialog box Sea MAXPRO MS R310 Enter pris Edition Language selection for analytics application Figure 3 19 Language selection for analytics application 10 From the Language drop down list select the required language 11 Click Next The Start Copying Files dialog box appears MAXPRO YMSI R310 Enterprise Edition Installed Figure 3 20 Start Copying Files 12 If you want to make any changes click Back MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 53 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE In some PCs the installation fails to enable MSMQ Message Queuing automatically In such scenarios the following message is displayed MAXPRO MS R310 Failed to enable MSMQ Please enable it after installation by referring to the documentation Setup will continue now To resolve this issue 1 After the server installation is completed download and install the windows update KB 2749655 based on your Operating System from the below site http support microsoft com kb 2749655 2 Refer and perform the instruction given in the below site to enable the MSMQ http msdn mi
241. monitors Monitors associated to a partition can be viewed or managed only by the users who are associated with it VIDEO OUTPUTS AND EVENT GROUPS An event group is a set of events that occur on video devices Event Groups are associated to monitors An alarm is generated When any event related to the monitor in the event group occurs VIDEO OUTPUTS AND J OYSTICK CONTROLLER Joystick controllers are associated to Monitors Monitors associated to a joystick controller can be controlled by a user who is also associated with the joystick controller ADDING VIDEO OUTPUTS You can add digital and analog video outputs like monitors smart devices standard device trunk VCR Standby VCR to display video Video output devices like digital monitors are connected to the client workstations The video output devices analog monitors are connected to the video matrix switchers Before you begin e Add Site e Switcher to associate the analog monitor e Add Workstation to associate the digital monitor Add Partition e Update Joystick Controller By default a site and partition are available You can associate the video outputs to them or create new To add a video output 1 Click the Configurator tab 164 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Outputs 2 Expand Devices in the navigation area and then click Video Outputs The Video Output screen appears
242. moves the shorter is the amount of time required to pass through the region of interest thereby decreasing the chance of motion being detected If you are using HNVE130A MPEG streamers AVPS uses I frames for video motion detection and the options available for this option are Every I frame and Every second I frame and so on When you select this option the frame rate given to the AVPS algorithm is displayed Sensitivity Indicates whether the scene is indoor or outdoor Shadow correction If there are many shadows in the scene turn shadow correction on to reduce the risk of false detections Turning this setting on has a high impact on the loading of the server Processing Type Indicates whether the algorithm analyzes the entire image Full Frame or only the regions of interest drawn ROI Only Full Frame processing provides more accurate results especially for small regions of interest because it can track objects over the whole frame The larger the area in which the object might move and the longer it takes to move in the area the camera has to classify more information and the detection is more accurate However it does increase the load on the CPU Note Even if you select Full Frame the conditions and associated responses such as raising alarms only apply if the object enters a region of interest DEFINING CONDITIONS You can define the condition or conditions that the moving objec
243. mpt to reboot the computer 9 Click OK Note You can remove the required component using the Add or Remove Programs in Windows However Honeywell recommends to follow the above mentioned steps to remove MAXPRO VMS R310 components 70 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Removing the MAXPRO VMS R310 Software AFTER REMOVING MAXPRO VMS R310 After removing MAXPRO VMS you must remove Microsoft Loopback Adapter manually To remove loopback adapter 1 box appears Right click My Computer and then select Properties The System Properties dialog Em o eon Spem Processor Inctatled memory RAM System type en and Touch Server 2068 R Copyright 2008 Meroscft Corporabon nights reserved View basic information about your computer Ines Corel Toe Duo HU E7400 d 2 6001 soa bk Oper song System No Ren or Touch inpas is aval fr thes Display znat Computer name damain arid workgroup settings Computer nana Fd coments Computer desciptiorn Windows activaten foumest activate Awa TEJAIWTSEPARS Muro wow oe actuate Windows nos Product ID 0877 79 QUOQUU HERE Chave prodr See aho Arten Windows Update 2 Click Device Manager Figure 3 49 System Properties The Device Manager screen appears File Acti
244. mputers Procedures for configuring the monitor display properties e Steps for installing the serial expander 3 Installing the MAXPRO VMS __ Procedure for installing MAXPRO VMS R310 Software R310 software 4 Configuring devices and Configure the MAXPRO VMS Setting up a Site S Verifying the Configuration Steps to verify the configuration of of MAXPRO VMS MAXPRO VMS 6 Upgrading to MAXPRO VMS Procedures to upgrade from previous R310 versions for MAXPRO VMS to MAXPRO VMS R310 TYPOGRAPHICAL CONVENTIONS This guide uses the conventions listed in the following table Font Swiss721 BT What it represents Words or characters that you must type The word Example Enter the password enter is used if you must type text and then press the Enter or Return key Menu titles and other items you select Double click Open from the File menu Buttons you click to perform actions Click Exit to close the program Trebuchet MS Heading Installation Swiss721 BT Bold Italic Cross reference to external source Refer to the System Administrator Guide Swiss721 BT Italic Cross reference within the guide See Installation 12 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide COMMISSIONING PLAN OVERVIEW Commissioning
245. n ID Type the station ID of the recorder Bit Filter Type Type the bit filter type Bit Filter ID Type the bit filter ID Source The source information is automatically updated when the Information Discover Cameras feature is used 198 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP SITE Alarm Inputs 2 On the Event Settings tab specify the following details Settings Description Event Description a description for the event Start Macro Type the required macro to start the event When an alarm condition is detected for an alarm input the alarm start macro is executed Finish Macro Type the required macro to end the event When a detected alarm input returns to its normal state the alarm end macro is executed Global ID Type a unique global ID If the Global Event ID is not assigned MAXPRO VMS assigns a unique global ID automatically when you save the event settings Severity Type a severity level Note Severity level is set to trigger alarms when the threshold is met For example if the threshold is set 50 in the preferences tab an alarm is triggered when threshold becomes 51 CONNECTING ALARM INPUT TO THE REMOTE CAMERA To connect alarm input to a remote camera 1 From the Remote Camera drop down list select the required camera The remote camera settings appear 2 On the Event Settings tab specify the following detai
246. nalytics Documentation Video Analytics V4 Reference Guide pdf or locate the file in installation DVD HONEYWELL VIDEO ANALYTICS ACTIVEYE ALARM MANAGEMENT The Honeywell Video Analytics ActivEye Alarm Management component allows you to monitor the real time alarms at a central station from multiple Video Analytics Servers There are three components that enable the alarm management functionality e Honeywell Video Analytics ActivEye Alarm Watch Admin e Honeywell Video Analytics ActivEye Alarm Watch Manager e Honeywell Video Analytics ActivEye Alarm Watch Station For more details refer to the Video Analytics V4 Reference Guide To access the guide choose Start gt Programs gt Honeywell Video Analytics Documentation Video Analytics V4 Reference Guide pdf or locate the file in installation DVD HONEYWELL VIDEO ANALYTICS ACTIVEYE CONFIGURATION TOOL Honeywell Video Analytics ActivEye configuration tool allows you to configure the rules in each camera view for your daily surveillance or operational needs 236 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Analytics For more details refer to the Video Analytics V4 Reference Guide To access the guide choose Start Programs Honeyvwell Video Analytics Documentation Video Analytics V4 Reference Guide pdf or locate the file in installation DVD HONEYWELL VIDEO ANALYTICS ACTIVEYE FORENSICS TooL Honeywell Vid
247. nd Installation Guide 265 266 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING Trinity Controller UP A SITE Settings Pretext Message Timeout in Instructions Description Type a value to define the time period for the seconds automatic display of pretext message line text Valid values are 2 99 seconds Default Test Mode From the drop down list select the required test mode Normal displays the system Configuration Summary e Rx data displays the data received on all the MAXPRO VMS Server serial communication ports TX data displays the data transmitted from all the MAXPRO VMS Server serial communication ports Execute Macros displays all the macro sequences executed by the system e Macro Trails displays the macro trail of the executed macro sequence on the screen e Error log displays all the subsequent entries to the error log file on the screen e Printer displays all the subsequent output to the hard copy printer on the screen Video Select displays every video switching action in the system Control displays every control action for PTZ cameras VCRs and so on Auto Number data is displayed on the menu output in this test mode However if this mode is selected the description text displayed on video output show the logical device number of the device at the start of the text line Note When the system is running the menu output can be selected to display
248. nes the line where the description for the video device is displayed Real Time Clock Defines the line the Real Time Clock is displayed Note Selecting the Select check box selects all the Text Line Settings 16 In the Text Display Settings area select the check boxes to select the text display settings The following table lists the options Option Description Enhanced Card To enhance the appearance of the text display Hidden Text To hide the text display on the monitor Shadow To apply shadow affect for the text display BackGround To apply background affect for the text display Reverse To reverse black white affect for the text display Black White Double Height To increase the height of text display on monitor Flash To display blinking text on the monitor Note Selecting the Select All check box enables all the Text Display Settings 17 18 19 168 In the X and Y boxes type a location for the text to appear on the monitor Valid positions are 1 13 X and Y coordinates represent the horizontal and vertical position respectively In the Device Macro Flags section select the required fields to set the macro flag to True This field allows for definition of the default cold boot state of the macro flags for the current video input device Click Select All to set all the macro flags to True Click Save MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation
249. nfigure object tracking and classification 1 Click the Advance Settings tab The Record Settings appears 2 Click the Video Analytics tab 3 Select the Video Analytics enabled check box 4 Use the General properties to set the algorithm motion server and detection type The following table lists the General properties and the instructions to configure them Settings Description Algorithm Select Standard Low CPU or Premium High CPU Motion Server The Video Analytics Server you want to use to run the algorithm Only applicable to server side algorithms Detection Type Select Continuous 24 hours a day 7 days a week e Scheduled the time s at which motion detection is enabled is specified in one or more schedules See Schedules for more information Note Changing from Scheduled to Continuous deletes all video analytics schedules for the camera The default is Continuous 5 Click Start tuning 6 Usethe regions of interest to define one or more regions See Defining Regions of Interest for more information 7 Define the Minimum size of an object that is to be tracked See Defining the Minimum Object Size for more information 8 Use the tuning properties to set motion detection frame rate and sensitivity See Tuning Properties for Object Tracking for more information 9 Click Finish tuning if the tuning properties are satisfactory 10 Configure the conditions for current ROI that moving objects must me
250. nformation To allow user to change the current system status Alarm Enable To allow system user to enable or disable system alarms Disable System To allow user to run the Windows SetMax configuration Configuration editor save the current system environment as the default settings or exit to Windows UserMacro Lock Unlock To allow user to lock or unlock user macros ToolBar Buttons SalvoLayouts To allow user to add or access different salvolayouts MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide Users Privileges Description Surrounding To allow user to view surrounding cameras Camera Full Screen Mode To allow user to view full screen mode Sync PlayBack To allow user to access the sync playback mode Mode Remote Monitor To allow user to access the remote monitor mode Mode Incident To allow user to access the incident management mode management Mode Create Salvo To allow user to create a salvo Application To allow user to access the application launch pad Launch Pad Salvo Snapshot To allow user to capture a salvo snapshot Instant Clip Export enable user to instantly export a clip Snapshot To capture a snapshot Color Correction Allow user to perform color correction Flip Allow user to flip a video
251. ng and alarming is disabled while you are tuning motion detection when you click Start Tuning e Ifyou select the Premium algorithm the algorithm uses the first 20 frames to learn the statistics of the field of view and the next 60 frames to set up the information learned during the first 20 frames Therefore motion is not detected in the field of view during the first 80 frames Before you begin e Configure the camera settings See Adding a Camera for more information e Associate the recorders See Associating Recorder to a Video Input Device for more information To configure the motion detection 1 Click the Advance Settings tab by default the Record Settings tab appears 2 Click the Video Analytics tab 3 Select the Video Analytics enabled check box 130 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs 4 Use the General properties to set the algorithm motion server and detection type The following table lists the General properties and the instructions to configure them Settings Description Algorithm Select Standard Low CPU or Premium High CPU Motion Server The Video Analytics Server you want to use to run the algorithm Only applicable to server side algorithms Detection Type Select Continuous 24 hours a day 7 days a week Scheduled the time s at which motion detection is enabled is specified in one or more schedu
252. now it or select one from the list 4 Inthe User Name box type your Windows user name In the Password box type your Windows password 6 Select the Enable Auto Logon check box if you want the computer to reboot on its own whenever required during the installation process Note You are prompted to reboot multiple times while upgrading to MAXPRO VMS R310 auto log on avoids manual intervention during multiple reboots A confirmation message is displayed as shown below Click Yes to continue EG i gt Enabling Auto Logon is not secure as the password will be stored in the registry Do you want to continue 326 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide UPGRADING VMS R310 Upgrading MAXPRO VMS R300 to MAXPRO VMS R310 7 Click Next The Features to be upgraded dialog box appears MAXPRO MS R310 Enterprise Edition Features to be upgraded The following Feat get upgraded Testa ined Figure 6 3 Features to be upgraded 8 The check boxes for the features to be upgraded are selected by default Select the new features you want to install by clicking the respective check boxes Note e Clear the check boxes for the features that you do not want to install upgrade While upgrading the recorder driver the message Are you sure you want to remove the Kinley Client appears Click OK to proceed with the recorder 400 3 upgrade installati
253. nsible for performing various operations like viewing video reporting alarms and other video surveillance tasks You can create two types of users in MAXPRO VMS System Local User and Windows User Any new user when added is automatically associated to all the event groups and joystick controller You can remove the association of a user to event groups and joystick controller to limit the access SYSTEM LOCAL USER A system local user can access only MAXPRO VMS This user may not have the access to client workstation WINDOWS USER A windows user can access client workstation and also MAXPRO VMS USERS AND ROLES Roles are provided to a user These roles comprise in them a set of privileges When a user is associated to a role the privileges that are available for the role are also assigned to the user THE ADMIN USER The first time MAXPRO VMS is deployed at a site a default user named admin is created The admin user is assigned the role administrator Only this user can add new users assign roles to the added users add or modify the privileges to the users and also assign the users to partitions USERS AND PARTITIONS A partition is a logical grouping of video devices Partitions are associated to users Users are directly associated to the partition which is associated to the role Users can view and manage the video devices that are grouped inside the associated partitions A user can also be associat
254. nstat i Cancel Figure 3 39 Restoring Trinity Database 4 Click Yes to retain the Trinity database and click No to delete the Trinity database The Restoring Analytics Database dialog box appears MAXPRO 5 R310 Enterprise Edition Restoring Analytics Database Do you want to retain the Analytic ase residing in Analytics Engine Q ves 9 uo Installshield Cancel Figure 3 40 Restoring Analytics Database MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Removing the MAXPRO VMS R310 Software Click Next The MAXPRO VMS R310 is removed completely and Uninstall Complete dialog box appears 5 MAXPRO YMS R310 Enterprise Edition Uninstall Complete InstallShield Wizard has finished uninstalling MA n Instati sid Figure 3 41 Uninstall Complete 6 Click Finish You are prompted to reboot the computer System requires a reboot Please save all the unsaved data before rebooting the system Figure 3 42 Prompt to remove few components 7 Click OK To remove few components 1 Insert the MAXPRO VMS R310 setup DVD in the DVD drive browse to the MAXPRO VMS R310 setup folder and then double click Setup exe or go to the MAXPRO VMS R310 setup folder in your computer and then double click Setup exe MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 67 68 INSTALLING THE VMS R310 SOFTWARE Removing the MAXPRO
255. nts will be installed Client components will be installed Client and Server is selected in R310 with no SQL instance SP1 and create the Database If you Upgrade from R300 Upgrades to SQL Express 2012 Only Upgrade the Database SQL will not be Server to R310 SP1 if R300 has SQL 2008 R2 upgraded available and upgrade the Database If you Upgrade from R300 Upgrades the client Upgrade the client Client to R310 If you Upgrade from R300 Installs the SQL Express 2012 It displays an error message as shown below MAXPRO VHS RITO gt For Windows 7 or 2008 R2 Service Pack 10r later is required for instaling SQL Express 2012 SP 1 Please download and install SQL Express 2008 R2 and start the installation again Installation wil abort now ze CLEANING THE SYSTEM The Uninstall Utility allows you to clean all the installed R310 components in the system Uninstall Utility is available in the installation path of VMS R310 under Tools folder It contains the Database Files SQL Scripts that allows you to clean the specific component After you clean the system you need to reinstall the R310 software Note Use this utility if uninstallation is not done properly To access and run the utility Browse the MAXPRO VMS R310 installation path for example C Program Files x86 Honeywell TrinityFramework Tools UninstallUtility folder and double click the UninstallUtility exe MAXPRO VMS Uninsta
256. o Quality drop down list select the required video quality The range is between 10 100 compression quality Control Settings Configure the Control Settings See Control Settings for more information Note The Control Settings tab appears only when PTZ is selected as Camera Type IPEngine Recorder Settings Inthe Camera Server drop down list select the camera server Inthe Camera Server Clip Directory box type the directory path to save the clips or click Set to camera server installed path to set the camera server installed path for saving clips Inthe Streamer IP Address box type host name or IP address of the streamer Inthe Streamer type drop down list select the model number of the streamer Note MAXPRO VMS supports five mega pixel cameras like GrandEye Sony HCX HNVEI and Pelco e Inthe Compression Format drop down list select the required format MPEG4 and Motion JPEG are the available formats e Inthe Limit Stream By drop down list select the frame rate or network bandwidth to limit streaming e Inthe Stream Type drop down list select the stream type as video or audio Inthe Frame Delivery drop down list select the delivery type as Unicast or Multicast depending on the requirement e Inthe Video Channel Number box type the input number of the streamer to which you are connecting the camera See Configuring Cameras for IP Engine for more information on configuring Gran
257. o a recorder is lost an event video loss is generated In MAXPRO VMS an alarm is triggered whenever an event occurs Event groups are created for providing privileges to the users for viewing or acknowledging the events that occur on the video devices By default 99 Event Groups are added in MAXPRO VMS Events that occur on the devices are grouped under different Event Groups By default all the events that can occur on devices are associated to Event Group 1 EVENT GROUPS AND USERS Event groups are associated to users When any events in the event group occur only the associated users can acknowledge it See Associating Event Groups to Users for more information EVENT GROUPS AND MONITORS Event groups are associated to monitors When any event in the event group occurs the event details are displayed in the associated monitors for viewing See Associating Video Outputs to Event Groups for more information ADDING AN EVENT GROUP You can add an event group to provide privileges for a user to acknowledge the events that occur on video devices To add an event group 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Groups in the navigation area and then click Event Groups The Event Groups screen appears in the display area 3 Click Add In the Event Group ID and Description column a default reference number and a description for the event group appear by default 5 Click Save DELETING AN EVENT GROUP You can delete an
258. o allow user to delete video output Output Add Sequence To allow user to add sequence Update Sequence To allow user to update sequence Delete Sequence To allow user to delete sequence Add Port To allow user to add a port Update Port To allow user to update a port Delete Port To allow user to delete a port Add Partition To allow user to add a partition Update Partition To allow user to update a partition Delete Partition To allow user to delete a partition Add Site To allow user to add a site Update Site To allow user to update a site Delete Site To allow user to delete a site Add Workstation To allow user to add a workstation Update To allow user to update a workstation Workstation Delete Workstation To allow user to delete a workstation Add Event Group To allow user to add event group Update Event To allow user to update event group Group Delete Event Group To allow user to delete event group Add Intercept To allow user to add intercept keys Update Intercept To allow user to update joystick controller Delete Intercept To allow user to delete intercept Update Joystick To allow user to update joystick controller Controller Add Role To allow user to add role Update Role To allow user to update role Delete Role To allow user to delete role Search Search Access To allow user to access search features Clip Archive To allow user to perform clip archive Clip Restore To allow user to perfo
259. o inputs from live cameras analyze the video content and extract relevant information from the video Automation of motion detection triggering real time alarms and enabling fast search and retrieval of video are some of the distinct features of analytics Video Analytics takes video inputs from multiple live cameras analyzes the video content in real time and extracts relevant information in the video The system includes analytics servers which analyze the content of the video and various client GUI applications that can connect to the analytics servers to perform specific management or monitoring tasks The applications can be launched directly from the server or from a separate client personal computer that can access the server through a TCP connection HONEYWELL VIDEO ANALYTICS ACTIVEYE REPORTING TooL The Honeywell Video Analytics ActivEye Reporting Tool provides statistics report generation for any of the events detected in the system including counting data as well as surveillance events You can configure the reporting template and also set up scheduled e mail reporting The Reporting Tool has three client applications e Honeywell Video Analytics ActivEye Reports Generator e Honeywell Video Analytics ActivEye Reports Health Monitor Honeywell Video Analytics ActivEye Reports Scheduler For more details refer to the Video Analytics V4 Reference Guide To access the guide choose Start Programs Honeywell Video A
260. o them in a tree structure Similarly sequences are listed in the Sequences window salvo views are listed in the Views window and monitors are listed in the Monitors window drop down box on the top of the Devices window and Monitors window lists the partitions The following figure illustrates the Viewer tab Drm SRR BSdevices Montos P My Devices MM Images Clip tab My Salvo Views imp Devices 5 Imageicup Shared Salvo Views PO Sequences Messages Views Biviews Sequences Messages TOLVHARS Figure 5 2 Viewer tab Ensure that all the devices sequences and salvo views added to the MAXPRO VMS are listed in the respective windows To view the list of devices monitors sequences and salvo views that are added e Click the required tab in the Viewer The devices monitors sequences and salvo views are displayed in a tree view For example if you want to view the sequences click the Sequences tab The Sequences window appears with the list of sequences displayed in a tree structure The sites that are associated to the monitors are also displayed in the Monitors window To view the list of devices and monitors for all the partitions e In the drop down box on the top of the Devices window select All Partitions The devices associated to the partition are displayed Similarly on the top of the Monitors window select Partitions The monitors associated to
261. ociate events To associate event attributes 1 Select the check box corresponding to the event for which you want to associate event attributes The Event attributes settings appear in the lower pane 2 Click Associate The Select Available Event Attributes dialog box appears 3 Select the check box corresponding to the event attributes that you want to associate 4 Click OK To disassociate event attributes from a video input e Select the check box corresponding to the event attribute and then click Remove ASSOCIATING PARTITIONS TO SCHEDULER You can associate partitions to a scheduler Associating a partition to a scheduler restricts a non associated user of the partition from viewing the scheduler or changing the settings of the scheduler You can associate more than one partition to a scheduler Before you begin e Add a Partition See Adding a Partition for more information To associate partitions to a scheduler 1 Click the Partitions tab The screen displays the associated partitions if any MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 283 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE DUUM D Schecter x Everts Figure 4 77 Scheduler Partitions 2 Click Associate The Select Partitions dialog box appears 3 Select the check box corresponding to the partition name you want to associate 4 Click OK To disassociate partitions from a scheduler e Select the check bo
262. ociate the alarm input to them or create new To add an alarm input 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand the Devices branch in the navigation area and then click Alarm Inputs The Alarm Input screen appears in the display area T mam Name CorneceiTo cpersrgNede meme tate Sat Procedure reih Procedure Outputs D INA 2 TEST 65 Rev me Oi Jess D Externalrouts aoso 40 onde E True Diye om Externalygt2 omzet acao 40 ims De Feheerwdirguk2t p ne 5 user Management Ds stent m me Contact aas Do Eaenw rpazt 40 me Hon 1 External gett asep 40 ie Exteenlnputls aozo 40 Tue D E tne T Ow 40 Bw Batrana tue 1 Esteerallrgut28 40 Tue Ser Du Lsternalingutz the Event Ds oren 0 tne Vers Ds Externallnputt 40 me Loges Camera Du 40 er Sistem Monos D us aoso E server D Katrenai accep E the Gene CLOSED 40 Tne De Fetrerlingut omect aon 40 T go Send ters De pee aoso 0 we ns Dxteenallrgutl DIRECT 40 me een Ds Extrentigxit
263. oller dialog box appears 3 Select the check box corresponding to the joystick name you want to associate 4 Click OK By default all the joystick controllers are associated when a user is added You can remove the joystick controllers that you do not require To disassociate Joystick Controller from user e Select the check box corresponding to the joystick name and then click Remove ASSOCIATING EVENT GROUPS TO USERS You can associate a user to a event group to acknowledge the event that occurs in it Before you begin e Add Event Group To associate a event group to a user 1 Click the Event Groups tab The screen displays the associated event groups if any MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 219 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Users Aysccited Event rouo Daxoowedtwe Ore T n Alarms 11957 6 19 15 Figure 4 49 User Event Groups 2 Click Associate The Select Event Groups dialog box appears 3 Select the check box corresponding to the Event Group name you want to associate 4 Click OK To disassociate event group from a user e Select the check box corresponding to the Event Group name and then click Remove DISCOVERING AND IMPORTING USERS You can discover users connected to a domain or workstation and add them to the MAXPRO VMS To discover and import users 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand User Management in the navigat
264. oller service To delete a recorder group 1 Inthe Recorder Groups screen select the required Recorder Group check boxes 2 Click Delete A confirmation message Do you really want to delete selected recorder group is displayed 3 Click Yes to delete MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 261 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE TRINITY CONTROLLER Trinity controller is a service which enables the system to fetch alarm status It allows you perform PTZ operations and execute the macros You can edit the special system parameters of the trinity controller These fields default to values that are satisfactory for most video system applications To update the trinity controller 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand the Servers branch in the navigation area and then click Controller The Controller screen appears in the display area 3 Click Update The Trinity Controller screen appears T Meo Level Fal n secs Neto och fte Network Node ID i gd Descrition F Forward Net Broadcast 7 Bherne Port Mander Raal Tine Clack Accuracy n secs E TAM Stel Cot EN Lg RR RE E Seer tg reta RSPR Figure 4 66 Trinity Controller 4 Specify the following settings e General Settings Settings Instructions Description Name By default the n
265. om 26026 DNS Server Standard 53 Trinity RenderingServer exe Client Connection Custom 20007 DNS Server Standard 53 ULTRAKEY To avoid UltraKey device from going offline on a firewall enabled environment please allow the following in the firewall rules e ICMP echo request type 8 packets out e ICMP echo reply type 0 packets in MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 79 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Configuring MAXPRO VMS CONFIGURING MAXPRO VMS You can configure the MAXPRO VMS using the Configurator tab in the user interface The navigation area inside the Configurator tab helps you to configure devices groups and manage users and roles To go to configurator tab 1 Double click the icon A on your desktop The Log On dialog box appears a eve English US English Username ord PUT Windows Logged In User Default Profile IEL1LT89H Figure 4 1 MAXPRO VMS Log on 2 Inthe Username box type the user name The default user name is admin 3 In the Password box type the password The default password for the default user name admin is trinity 4 Click El The Viewer tab appears by default 80 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide Viewer Configurator Device View E dis Devices 13 Recorders f Video Inputs Video Outputs Tp Joystick Controllers i switchers p Relays Alarm Inputs A di User Management Contact Group aT C
266. omatic Windows updates as shown below Click Yes to disable and proceed The Welcome dialog box appears See Windows Updates Automatic Windows update has been enabled in your system To install MAXPRO VMS R310 you have to disable automatic updates Click Y es to disable automatic updates and proceed with installation MAXPRO MS R310 Enterprise Edition Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for MAXPRO MS R310 Enterprise Edition D Enterprise Edition Figure 3 1 Welcome 2 Click Next The License Agreement dialog box appears The dialog box displays the license agreement for the MAXPRO VMS software 40 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE How to Install VMS MAXPRO MS R310 Enterprise Edition License Agreement HONEYWELL SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR HONEYWELL SOFTWARE IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY This Honeywell End User License Agreement this Agreement is a legal agreement between you either an individual or a single entity and Honeywell International Inc including its subsidiaries for the Honeywell software product identified above which includes computer software and may include associated media printed materials and online or electronic documentation and any future versions releases updates patches error fixes and bug fixes of the above identified Honeywell software product that is prov
267. on MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 327 UPGRADING TO MAXPRO VMS R310 Upgrading MAXPRO VMS R300 to MAXPRO VMS R310 9 Click Next The Choose Cache file location dialog box appears MS R310 Enterprise Edition Choose Cache file location Enter Trinity Controller cache file directory path C Program Files x86 Honeywell TrinityFramework CacheFiles Cancel Figure 6 4 Choose Cache File Location 10 Click Next Step 9 is required only if Analytics is selected in the Features to be upgraded dialog box 11 Click Next The Start Copying Files dialog box appears MAXPRO MS R310 Enterprise Edition Start Copying Files Re gs before copying files Setup has enough information to u want to review or change any g you z with thi ings clic begin copying Files Current Settings aokolokokekelelelekeleke Total Approximate Time to Install Pre Requisites 2 mins Total Approximate Time to Install MAXPRO VMS Products 49 mins EEk Estimated Time Break Up for Pre Requisites oto toto aici aR ak ki aR aR kK ai ai aa ak ak ao a a 1 mins Microsoft YC Redistributable 2008 Add On 1 mins Microsoft Visual 2010 x86 Redistributable jE EEE EEK Estimated Time Break Up For MAXPRO MS Components 1 mins Honeywell HD3MDIP Adapter Build Install shield uA Bi Cancel Figure 6 5 Start Copying Files MAXPRO VMS R310 Commiss
268. on Or If you want to import the files to a network location click the ellipses button specify the path and then click Load 5 In the IP Address Hostname box type the IP address or host name of the Enterprise recorder from which mapping has been done in the enterprise HLI file that is being imported Note The IP Address Hostname box appears only when you select Enterprise HLI as the source type 5 Click Import Note When you change the IP address of an Enterprise recorder after importing the HLI file a message asking for confirmation to delete sub devices appears If you click Yes the hybrid cameras revert to analog cameras The VCR entries are missed and hence you have to import mpn and ini file once again to retain the settings of Maxpronet and HLI However the Digital Input Trunk remains unchanged If you click No the settings of hybrid camera does not change It is recommended to click No when the message asking for confirmation appears to deflect sub devices EQUIP SERIES CAMERA You can upgrade assign a new IP and also check the version details of the Equip series cameras that are connected to MAXPRO VMS MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 277 278 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Equip Series Camera To discover Equip series cameras 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand IP Camera Management in the navigation area and then click Equip Series The Equip Serie
269. on Enhanced Card To enhance the appearance of the text display Hidden Text To hide the text display on the monitor Shadow To apply shadow affect for the text display BackGround To apply background affect for the text display Reverse To reverse black white affect for the text display Black White Double Height To increase the height of text display on monitor Flash To display blinking text on the monitor Note Selecting the Select All check box enables all the Text Display Settings ADDING A VIDEO OuTPUT DEVICE DIGITAL OUTPUT TRUNK 1 2 3 4 In the VideoOutput Name box type the name for the monitor In the Description box type a description for the monitor In the Callup Number box an automatic number is allocated by default The operator uses this number to select a monitor from the keyboard In the Site box select the location in which the monitor is used MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 171 172 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Outputs 5 Select the Lock VideoOutput check box to lock monitor from displaying video 6 In the Slot box type the slot number to identify the slot location of the video output channel 7 Inthe Video Timeout box type the display time out period The display time out period can be set from 1 999 seconds Enter a value zero if this function is not required 8 Inthe Text Line Settings area select the check boxes according
270. on How to Install MAXPRO VMS The Installation Type dialog box appears MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 49 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Custom Installation 2 Select Custom Installation and then click Next The Select Features dialog box appears Features to be upgraded The following features will get upgraded System will upgrade only the installed components Please select the new features according to the need Neb Client InstallShield Figure 3 15 Select Features Note Beta version drivers are supported but not tested 3 Select MAXPRO VMS Server and then click Next Note You can add the device drivers and other features at a later stage if required At any point if the R310 installation fails to install the selected component you can clean the system using the Uninstall Utility and then reinstall the R310 software See Cleaning the System 50 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Custom Installation 4 The Database Server Login dialog box appears MAXPRO YMS R310 Enterprise Edition Database Server Lo Datal ASQLEXPRESS InstallShield Figure 3 16 Database Server Login 5 Click Browse and then select any existing SQL database You can select the existing SQL database on the same network If you do not want to select an existing database click Next and
271. on View Help eet 107 B IE1AIW7S6P3BS Computer cs Disk drives E Display adapters hi DVD CD ROM drives j Human Interface Devices Keyboards m Monitors El amp Network adapters Broadcom Netxtreme Broadcom Netxtreme Microsoft Loopback A 9 Ports COM amp LPT A Processors System devices xj IDE ATAJATAPI controllers F Mice and other pointing devices Teredo Tunneling Pseudo Interface Sound video and game controllers Ej Universal Serial Bus controllers 57xx Gigabit Controller Gigabit Ethernet idapter MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide Figure 3 50 Device Manager 71 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE SQL Express 2012 Scenarios 3 Expand the Network Adapter branch right click Microsoft Loopback Adapter and then select Uninstall The Confirm Device Removal dialog box appears Confirm Device Uninstall xi A Microsoft Loopback Adapter Warning You are about to uninstall this device from your system Cancel Figure 3 51 Confirm Device Removal 4 Click OK SQL EXPRESS 2012 SCENARIOS The following table depicts the various scenarios of SQL Express 2012 while installing the VMS R310 Table 2 4 SQL Express 2012 Scenarios R310 Installation Scenarios SQL 2012 SP1 Express Supported OS SQL 2012 SP1 Express Unsupported OS If operating system service pack is not installed then
272. ons Administrator and operator are the predefined roles in MAXPRO VMS and consists of a set of privileges The role Administrator cannot be deleted or updated Apart from the predefined roles you can add a new role with a set of privileges When you associate users to the role the privileges that are defined as a part of the role is also added to the user Any new partition and workstation added are automatically associated to the administrator role If required you can also add or remove privileges for a user role combination The modified set of privileges is applied only to the specific user role combination and does not change the privilege set for the role ROLES AND PARTITIONS A partition is a logical grouping of video devices Partitions are associated to Roles Roles are assigned to users which enable them to view and manage the video devices that are grouped inside the associated partitions ROLES AND WORKSTATIONS A workstation is a computer in which the MAXPRO VMS user interface is installed Workstations are associated to Roles Roles are assigned to users which enables them to log on to MAXPRO VMS user interface and perform various actions ADDING A ROLE You can add a new role by providing a role name After adding a role you can associate users to it The role along with its set of privileges is added to the user You can also add or remove privileges to the user role combination In addition you can also deny all privi
273. ontact Users EB Roles B 5 Groups a Sequences i Partitions Workstations Intercept Keys Logical Camera System Macros B server 1 amp 3 Recorder Group i3 Controller Serial Ports El fs Association jj User Defined Events Event Association E Migratior Import 3 Export El amp amp IP Camera Management EQUIP Series E Scheduling G scheduler Job Alarm Notification 5 Server Setting Email Template 159 99 187 252 Clip Export MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Configuring MAXPRO VMS 5 Click Configurator tab The Configurator screen appears Search Administrator MAXPRO VMS do 23 Figure 4 2 Configurator tab Messages 0 Alarm s 5 admin 24 v 11 23 00 AM 81 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE IBS Setting up a site using Configurator SETTING UP A SITE USING CONFIGURATOR OOOOH OHHH OHHH HHH HHH HHH HHH HHH HHH HHH HHH HHH HHH HHH HHH HHO HHO HHH OOOO A site enables you to monitor the activities in an area Setting up a site involves adding and configuring the hardware devices defining the users partitions recorder groups and event groups Setting up a site involves the following ADDING SITES A default site is added when you install MAXPRO VMS You can use the default site and associate the hardware devices to it You can also create new sites Se
274. operators can use the number to quickly view the video from the video input device using the virtual keyboard See About Virtual Keyboard in Monitoring a Site section Site Location of the camera 2 Inthe Alternative Settings area specify the following details Field Description Alternate Camera Type the number of the camera that has to be selected as an alternate camera when ALT key is pressed on the keyboard The range of valid camera numbers is 1 9999 Zero 0 is the default value and indicates no alternate camera is defined 162 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs Field Alternate Camera View Description Type the camera view number or preset number to select the preset view for the alternate camera Pressing the ALT key not only displays the alternate camera but also move it automatically to the designated VIEW preset The valid camera views range is 1 99 0 is the default value which indicates no camera view is to be selected 3 Inthe Connected To section select Switcher See Associating a Switcher to a Video Input for more information 4 From the Switcher drop down list select the required switcher Specify the following details in the switcher settings Settings Description Primary Subrack ID The ID that is associated while adding a switcher is displayed
275. ore Intel Xeon Processor E5620 12M Cache 2 40 GHz 5 86 GT s Intel QPI Recommended Microsoft Windows 7 Professional 64 Bit and 32 Operating System Bit Microsoft Windows 8 1 Professional 32 Bit and 64 Bit Few of the recorders run only on specific operating systems Before installing the device drivers for the recorders please refer to the Operating Systems sheet in the MAXPROVMS HW SW Compatibility Matrix xls file available on the MAXPRO VMS R310 DVD Recommended Workstation Computer Type Server or Workstation Recommended System 8 GB Memory RAM DVD Drive RW Read DVD RW drive Write is required if Disk Single Disk or RAID 0 or 0 1 10K SATA 80GB or 10K to 15K SAS 73GB Windows Operating System Multiple Monitor Card 1 x 256MB PCIe x16 NVIDIA Quadro NVS 285 Dual Display Adapter Video DVI or Dual VGA or DVI VGA This is for a two Resolution monitor setup with each monitor requiring 128 MB Network Connection 1Gbit sec or greater Video Resolution 1024x768 pixels 24 bit color or higher MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Gui de SETTING UP THE CLIENT AND THE SERVER COMPUTERS Configuring the Monitor Display Properties CONFIGURING THE MONITOR DISPLAY PROPERTIES The recommended display settings for the monitor are dialog box resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels and color quality of 65K colors non interlaced The display settings can be configured f
276. ost name of the Digital Sentry recorder Click Ping to verify the connection The field appears in green if the IP address or the host name is valid Select the Check for duplicate IP address device name in the database check box to check the availability of the host name Inthe Site Port box the port number appears by default Inthe User ID box type the user name to access the recorder nthe Password box type the password to access the recorder e Select the Time Zone check box to enable the global time zone box and select the required time zone 88 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP SITE Recorders Recorder Type MileStone To configure the device settings Inthe Site Address box type the numeric IP address or host name of the computer where the Milestone Server application is installed Click Ping to verify the connection The field appears in green if the IP address or the host name is valid Inthe User Type drop down list select either Basic or Windows User as applicable Inthe User ID box type the user name of the selected user Inthe Password box type the password of the selected user Inthe Central Address box type the IP address or host name of the computer where Mile Stone Server application is installed Inthe Central Port box the port number appears by default Inthe User ID box the defau
277. p 2 Double click the Event Group box The Select Event Groups dialog box appears Select the check box corresponding to the Event Group you want to add 4 Click OK Note You need to add an event group before you associates it to an event See Adding an Event Group for more information To delete user defined events 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand the Associations branch in the navigation area and then click User Defined Events The User defined event association screen appears in the display area Select the check box corresponding to the event that you want to delete 4 Click Delete A message asking for confirmation appears 5 Click Yes MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 273 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE EVENT ASSOCIATION The devices such as recorders and cameras have predefined events MAXPRO VMS provides an option to associate events to a set of cameras and recorders at one stretch with just a few mouse clicks Note Use this feature to do bulk association of events to a set of cameras and recorders To associate events to cameras and recorders 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Associations in the navigation area and then click Event Association The Event Association screen appears in the display area Event Association Event Type Fiter Recorder Video trout Events Event Desegin L oit gt 22100 Figure 4
278. pears 4 From the Sequence Type drop down list select the required sequence type The available sequence types are listed in the table Sequence Description Type Scan During a Scan sequence operation camera selection entries are wrapped around when the end of the scan sequence is reached This mode of operation continues until the scan sequence is halted Tour During a Tour sequence the scan sequence is stepped through only once Index When Index is selected for this field it indicates that the table is used to hold information for complex macro programming 5 Inthe Description box type a name for the sequence 6 Follow steps 7 through 11 if you select Scan or Tour as scan type If you select index type In the Sequence Type drop down list select Index e the index value corresponding to the camera ID e Click Save 7 Inthe Dwell Time box type the dwell time in seconds for the camera to display video before advancing to next camera 8 Inthe Select Cameras list click The Select from List dialog box appears 9 Select the check box corresponding to the cameras that must be included in the sequence 10 Click OK to close the Select from List dialog box The cameras included in the sequence appear in the Select Cameras list MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 233 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE 11 To include presets in the sequence type the pres
279. pears in the display area 3 Select the check box corresponding to the Joystick Controller and then click Update A Joystick Controller screen appears 4 Inthe Default Monitor drop down list select the default monitor to be associated with the joystick controller For example if the monitor number is one to which you have associated the required switcher then select Monitor 1 as the default monitor 5 Inthe Default Operator drop down list select the default user to be associated with the joystick controller Note An operator must be added before you add a joystick controller 6 Click Save After these settings are made in MAXPRO VMS restart the Trinity Services Note Check whether you are able to drag and drop configured cameras on to the monitor UPDATING A SWITCHER You can update a switcher to change or edit the settings like the recorder name site and COM port To update a switcher 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Devices in the navigation area and then click Switchers The Switchers screen appears in the display area 3 Select the check box corresponding to the switcher you want to update 4 Click Update The general settings for the switcher appears You can modify the settings according to your needs DELETING A SWITCHER To delete a switcher 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Devices in the navigation area and then click Switchers The Switchers screen appears in the displa
280. period for which event related recordings are available for playback before they are automatically archived If set this must be less than the Delete after period otherwise the clips are deleted before they can be archived The duration commences at the clip s end date and time Delete event after The duration for which event related recordings are stored before being automatically deleted The duration commences at the clip s end date and time Archive low alarms after The period for which low alarm recordings are available for playback before they are automatically archived If set this must be less than the Delete low alarms after period otherwise the clips are deleted before they can be archived The duration commences at the clip s end date and time Delete low alarms after The period for which low alarm recordings are stored before being deleted The duration commences at the clip s end date and time Archive high alarms after The period for which high alarm recordings are available for playback before they are automatically archived If set this must be less than the Delete high alarms after period otherwise the clips are deleted before they can be archived The duration commences at the clip s end date and time Delete high alarms after The period for which high alarm recordings are stored before being deleted The duration commences at the clip s end date and time MAXPRO VMS R310
281. ppears in the display area D Rays x Retar _ Osta sae comected to Network 1 Contra TS Filin ASC ns 2 Conroe c Coenie Faka e Fake Cortreitnepes Pake Ciupa 7 17 Fake Cintia i i Figure 4 35 Relays 3 Click Add The Relay screen appears 188 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Relays 7 Recorder C Network Wh Level Device Figure 4 36 Relays General 4 Inthe Callup Number box type the unique ID to identify the relay By default MAXPRO VMS assigns the next available ID In the Relay Description box type a description for the relay 6 In the Site drop down list select the site In the Connected To section click one of the devices from which you want to add a relay The following table lists the available devices to which a relay can be connected Device Switcher Description For details on connecting to a switcher see Connecting Relay to the Switcher Analog Camera For details on connecting to a analog camera see Connecting Relay to the Analog Camera Keyboard For details on connecting to a keyboard see Connecting the relay to Keyboard Recorder For details on connecting to
282. ppears in the display area Test Uer Defined Events teat Note This and any attachments thereto are niended ordy For use by the acres termed eren ond rany cantan pringas arfur eke eee Preview 13067 Figure 4 84 Email Template 3 From the Text Type drop down list select required text type for sending an email The default text type is HTML 4 Inthe Subject box the default subject that appears in an e mail displays You can type a new subject as per your requirement 5 Inthe Email Title Logol and Email Title Logo2 do one of the following a Click Browse to browse and select the title logo image for the e mail b Click Default to retain the default logo image c Click No Logo to remove the selected or default logo image Note The dimension for Email Logo 1 should be 900 X 50 and for Email logo 2 should be 400 X 50 6 Inthe Heading Text box the default heading text displays You can type a new heading text as per your requirement 7 Inthe Message to User box type the required message to user if any 8 Inthe Signature box provide the signature 9 Inthe No Reply Info box type the no reply message to the user if any 10 In the Contact Info box type the contact details for user to communicate 292 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AN
283. r tab MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 157 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE TO vices inputs 2 Expand Devices in the navigation area 3 Click the Video Inputs s node The Video Inputs s screen appears in the display area ER ye se Remrdes C13 Vdeoinputs gt E gh Devices Aci Vidc Bree mham heater wd dec hare to rac ty hat cen Reset Fae Vedra Dads T MIT Nr Tfaa Sadis Aoa Stale Fj Drim Hw w MOAMOLP 1 Digtal fied Camera 65 Rev C 2 D p amies Dan on WISI 1 Tayta Fand Camera Bid 65 Rew C 5 Dm Oid 2 d 5 P iher no ATSP Strem 1865 Digital Fred Camera Bud 65 Rev C Deta Cussbled Ow RTSP Stram Digital aad camara Dd 05 Rev C u poss m RTSP Siren 3845 Digia Casera Buil 6 Rev C 4 Delos Denali Carrera Bus ais RTSP trem 405 wed Camera Bud 65 Rev C v Comes D ous RTSP Stren 665 Camera Bold 0 Kev C 1 Leak astie rwa us RTSP Strem 6865 Pand Camera uid 65 Aey C Dex s RTSP Serem 065 Den Pired Onara Dad 65 Rev C 1 Defask Ceablad Comers RTSP Stren SP65 Digtal Fed Camara Rd 65 Rav C u Odak Created HOSEL Digtal Aimed Camera Bolti 65 Rey C Defouk Comer 5 Acus 1 Dt PTA
284. r to which the VideoBlox alarm concentrator AVBPIT is connected Valid range V maximum communication ports Subrack Slot Type a slot number within the control subrack where the alarm input resides 3 Onthe Event Settings tab specify the following details Settings Description Event Description a description for the event Start Macro Type an alarm start macro When an alarm condition is detected for an alarm input the alarm start macro is executed Finish Macro Type an alarm finish macro When a detected alarm input returns to its normal state the alarm finish macro is executed Global ID Type a unique global ID If the Global Event ID is not assigned MAXPRO VMS assigns a unique global ID automatically when you save the event settings Severity Type a severity level Note Severity level is set to trigger alarms when the threshold is met For example if the threshold is set 50 in the preferences tab an alarm is triggered when threshold becomes 51 4 Onthe Event Groups tab select the check box corresponding to the event group that you want to associate to the alarm input and then click Associate 5 Click Save ASSOCIATING PARTITIONS TO THE ALARM INPUT You can associate partition to alarm inputs Associating a partition to an Alarm Input restricts non associated user from viewing or modifying the Alarm Input Before you begin e Add a Partition
285. r vertex you can have up to 10 vertices except the last vertex 5 Double click to mark the last vertex or drag the mouse pointer to the first vertex of the shape and release the mouse button MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 131 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE TE Note To cancel the task of defining a region of interest right click or press the ESC key To select a region of interest Click the region of interest to select it If regions of interest overlap click the edge of the region to select To modify a region of interest 1 Click the region of interest to select it Selection handles appear 2 Drag a selection handle as required The vertices move as you drag To modify an irregular region of interest 1 Double click at the point where you want to add a new vertex 2 Drag the selection handle to create the new shape for region of interest To move a region of interest 1 Click the region of interest to select it 2 Dragitto its new location Note Dragging it by a selection handle might change its shape To delete a vertice e Click the vertice and drag it onto the vertice next to it to merge them To delete a region of interest 1 Click the region of interest to select it 2 Press DELETE TUNING PROPERTIES Algorithm tuning properties involves configuring the motion detection by a camera depending on the frame rate of the motion size of the object invol
286. ram Files Microsoft SQL Server MSSQL11 SQLEXPRESS64BIT MSSQL DA TA Note DATABASEPATH should be replaced with the path fetched from the registry apart from the selected SQL instance name s DATA path where mdf and ldf files will be stored INSTANCENAME SQLEXPRESS64BIT PASSWORD Obvmw gt TRINITY DBSERVER admin PCVMS SQLEXPRESS64BIT SQLMODE 1 TRINITYDATABASEPA c Program Files Microsoft SQL TH Server MSSQL11 SQLEXPRESS64BIT MSSQL DA TA 76 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE SQL Express 2012 Scenarios Note If you are using 32 bit Operating System then you should not access the Wow6432 Node EXECUTING THE CREATE TRINITY DB R310 BAT FILE Prerequisites Ensure that you have updated the config files and added the registry entries as explained in To update the config files and To add the registry entries To execute the create trinity db R310 bat file 1 Browse the create trinity db R310 bat file in the Tools folder available in the setup media 2 Right click the create trinity db R310 bat file and then select Run as Administrator If you have selected SQL authentication then the execution prompts for SQL server name windows authentication option or SQL authentication option user name and password 3 Provide the necessary details The TrinityDatabase is created MAXPR
287. rd for Record frame rate and Archive after and Delete after properties for video clips created when motion is detected MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide Video Inputs 135 136 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs Settings Description Pre record for The duration of video that the IP engine keeps in memory for motion detection recordings When motion is detected and a recording is started the IP engine inserts this pre record segment at the start of the recording Configuring a pre record period on the recording allows you to view what was happening immediately before the motion was detected and a recording started For example if you set this to 10 seconds the recording shows the 10 seconds of video before the recording was activated Record for The length of time in seconds recording takes place after motion is detected If you select Until motion finishes the recording continues until no motion is detected in the scene for the length of time specified in the Consider motion finished after property Record frame rate The frame rate at which video is recorded for motion detection recordings Archive after The period for which a motion detection recording is available for playback before being archived The duration commences at the video clip s end date and time Delete after The duration for which motion detection recordings are stored before bein
288. re 1 13 X and Y coordinates represent the horizontal and vertical position respectively MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Outputs 11 In the Device Macro Flags section select the required fields to set the macro flag to True This field allows for definition of the default cold boot state of the macro flags for the current video input device Click Select to set all the macro flags to True 12 Specify the Video Source in the Digital Settings tab Option Description Video Source From the drop down list select the required video input device to display video DELETING A VIDEO OUTPUT DEVICE To delete a video output device 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Devices in the navigation area and then click Video Outputs The Video Outputs screen appears in the display area Select the check box corresponding to the video output device that you want to delete 4 Click Delete A confirmation message appears on top of the display area Click Yes UPDATING A VIDEO OUTPUT DEVICE You can update a video output device to change its association with a partition joystick controller and also to modify its settings To update a video output 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Devices in the navigation area and then click Video Outputs The Video Outputs screen appears in the display area Select the check box corresponding to the
289. recorder devices 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Devices in the navigation area and then click Recorders The Recorders screen appears in the display area 3 Double click the check box corresponding to the recorder from which you want to discover devices The recorder screen and the settings appear MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 95 96 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders 4 Click Discover Devices The Discovery Wizard dialog box appears Discover devices for MAXPRO NVR 1 Please select the Device Type to discover Cameras Relays Sensors View Advanced Settings How do you want to add discovered devices last Callup number Override device name if it already exists Discovery Status Connection established Figure 4 4 Discovery Wizard 5 Select the device or devices that you want to discover 6 Click View Advanced Settings to configure advanced settings and to specify the order of discovered devices Settings Start from last Callup number Instruction Select this option if you want to add the device from the last callup number of the device type that has been selected Use free Callup number Select this option to use the available callup number in the device type that has been selected Select starting Callup number Type the starting callup number and then choose an option from If Callup number already exists
290. relay Update Relay To update relay Delete Relay To delete relay Add Alarm Input To add an alarm input Update Alarm Input To update an alarm input Delete Alarm Input To delete an alarm input Update Controller To update controller Import To Import files into MAXPRO VMS Export To export the MAXPRO VMS files MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 225 226 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND Roles SETTING UP A SITE Privileges Description Configure Equip To configure equip camera Camera Cold Warm Boot To allow user to boot Add Job To add a job Update Job To update a job Delete Job To delete a job Add Contact To add a contact Update Contact To update a contact Delete Contact To delete a contact Add Contact Group To add a contact group Update To update a contact group Contact Group Delete Contact Group To delete a contact group Add User To add new users Delete User To allow user to delete new users Modify User Privilege To modify user privilege Add Recorder To allow user to add recorder Update Recorder To allow user to update recorder Delete Recorder To allow user to delete recorder Add Video Input To allow user to add Video Input Update Video Input To allow user to update video input Delete Video Input To allow user to delete video input Add Video Output To allow user to add video
291. ress IP Address of encoder MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 105 106 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders Recorder Event Name Event Attribute Description Attributes RingBuffer RingBuffer Name Name of the RingBuffer Insufficient Space 5 RingBuffer Numeric value of StationID RingBuffer RingBuffer ID Numeric value of RingBuffer ID RingBuffer RingBuffer Name Name of the RingBuffer Hard E Numeric value of StationID RingBuffer RingBuffer ID Numeric value of RingBuffer ID Station Connected Station Numeric value of Station ID Station Station Numeric value of Station Disconnected ID Fusion Output Enabled RelayNumber Numeric value of the Input Number Output Disabled RelayNumber Numeric value of the Input Number Recording Settings Retrieved MAXPRO MAXPRO VMS Instance ID Numeric value of the VMS Sever Connected recorder ID VMS ID Numeric value of the VMS ID MAXPRO VMS Instance ID Numeric value of the Server recorder ID Di t Dod VMS ID Numeric value of the VMS ID MAXPRO VMS Instance ID Numeric value of the Controller recorder ID ti VMS ID Numeric value of the VMS ID MAXPRO VMS Instance ID Numeric value of the Controller recorder ID Di t VMS ID Numeric value of the VMS ID MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE
292. rk 3 5 Features NET Framework 3 5 includes NET 2 0 and 3 0 HTTP Activation Non HTTP Activation Web Server IIS Web Server Application Development NET Extensibility 3 5 Windows Process Activation Service NET Environment 3 5 Export configuration settings Specify an alternate source path Figure 1 1 Confirm Installation Selection 10 Click Install MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide SETTING UP THE CLIENT AND THE SERVER COMPUTERS Enabling Windows NET 3 5 To enable NET 3 5 on Windows 8 and Server 2012 machine without internet connection 1 Insert the Windows OS DVD in the DVD drive 2 Browse the Sxs folder and copy the path For Example E Sources SxS 3 Execute the following command from the command prompt window using the Administrative privileges The PATH TO WIN SXS FOLDER should be replaced with the actual path of Sxs folder as explained in step 2 WINDIR system32 dism exe online enable feature featurename NetFX3 featurename WCF HTTP Activation featurename WCF NonHTTP Activation all Source x PATH TO WIN SXS FOLDER LimitAccess Note Use the cmd exe available in the path C windows system32 folder on 64 bit Operating System Tm C Windows system32 gt dism exe online enable feature featurename NetFX3 featur WCF HTTP Activation featurename WUCF NonHTTP f ctivation all Source C U sers admin Desktop NWIN8 64 Bit sxs Limit
293. rm clip restore MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 213 214 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Users Privileges Description Clip Delete To allow user to perform to delete clip Reports Report Access To allow user to access report features Controller Operator Privileges Display Name To display the users name Multiple SignOn To allow user to be signed on to more than one keyboard at a time Swap PTZ Up To reverse the up down control of a pan tilt camera when it is Down being used by user Scan Set To allow user to edit scan sequences Camera View Set To allow user to set PTZ camera views UserMacro Set To allow user to create user keyboard macros Camera Analog PTZ To allow user to set PTZ options for analog camera Standard Device To allow user to control standard device functions Video Recorder To allow user to control VCR functions Smart Device To allow user to control smart device functions Controller Menu Access Video Disable To disable live video view for a user ScanSequenceLock To allow user to lock or unlock scan sequences Unlock VideoControl Lock To allow user to lock or unlock video control Unlock Set Clock To allow user to set the system time and date SignOff To allow user to sign off from a key board Change Pin To allow user to change the PIN of all system users Status I
294. role Delete Role To allow user to delete role Search Search Access To allow user to access search features Clip Archive To allow user to perform clip archive Clip Restore To allow user to perform clip restore Clip Delete To allow user to perform to delete clip Reports Report Access To allow user to access report features Controller Operator Privileges Display Name To display the users name Multiple SignOn To allow user to be signed on to more than one keyboard at a time Swap PTZ UpDown To reverse the up down control of a pan tilt camera when it is being used by user Scan Set To allow user to edit scan sequences Camera View Set To allow user to set PTZ camera views UserMacro Set To allow user to create user keyboard macros Camera Analog PTZ To allow user to set PTZ options for analog camera Standard Device To allow user to control standard device functions Video Recorder To allow user to control VCR functions Smart Device To allow user to control smart device functions MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 227 228 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND Roles SETTING UP A SITE Privileges Controller Menu Access Description Video Disable To disable live video view for a user ScanSequence Lock To allow user to lock or unlock scan sequences Unlock VideoControl Lock To allow u
295. rom the Windows control panel or from the Windows desktop through the context menu To configure the display settings from the context menu in the Windows desktop Right click the Windows desktop to display the context menu Click Properties The Display Properties dialog box appears Click the Settings tab 1 2 3 4 Select the dialog box resolution and color quality 5 Click Apply to save the settings 6 Click OK to close the dialog box To configure the display settings from the Windows control panel 1 Go to Windows control panel Note To open the control panel click Start gt Settings gt Control Panel Double click the Display icon The Display Properties dialog box appears Click the Settings tab Select the dialog box resolution and color quality Click Apply to save the settings Click OK to close the dialog box M ER ABOUT SERIAL EXPANDER EE EEE HOO OHHH OHHH HOH HHH OHHH OHHH OOH OHO OOD The serial expander cable is used for increasing the number of serial ports in the computer One end of the serial expander cable connects to a serial port in the computer The other end of the serial expander cable consists of eight serial ports to which you can connect serial devices For example you can install the serial expander in the server to connect serial MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 25 26 SETTING UP THE CLIENT AND THE
296. ros The System Macros screen appears in the display area 97 System Macros x Delete Syme Macros i MADO 7 41 LA Tot Tel 10 dox Shuttle RW Total Record Court 91 Restore Figure 4 60 System Macros Click Add A System Macro is added 4 Inthe Description column type a description for the system macro for reference In the Macro Execution Sequence column type the key press sequence or special command to perform the required function EXECUTING A SYSTEM MACRO MAXPRO VMS provides a feature to execute a system macro as and when it is created To execute a system macro 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Groups in the navigation area and then click System Macros The System Macros screen appears in the display area 3 Select the check box corresponding to the system macros you want to execute The desired macro is executed 256 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP SITE System Macros Note Click Restore to restore all the system macros to their factory default settings The following message appears All macros will be reset to factory default All your modifications will be removed Do you want to Proceed Click Yes or No as applicable DELETING A SYSTEM MACRO To delete a system macro 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Groups in the navigation area and then clic
297. rs Click Local Policies double click User Rights Assignment and then double click Backup Files and Directories The Backup Files and Directories Properties dialog box appears Hone um jm Click Add User or Group The Select User or Groups dialog box appears Type the user account that is being used for setup and then click OK two times Repeat steps 1 through 7 for the other two policies that are mentioned in the Cause section 9 Onthe File menu click Exit to close the Local Security Settings dialog box WINDOWS UPDATES If the windows updates feature is enabled in any of the operating system then while installing MAXPRO VMS R310 the following message is displayed Question BE Setup has detected that automatic windows updates is enabled on this system Please ensure that there are no windows updates running in the background while MAXPRO YMS setup is running IF windows updates are running please wait For it to complete reboot the system and then start the MAXPRO VMS installation Click Yes to proceed with the installation ye J User is recommended to wait until the windows updates are installed and then reinstall the VMS R310 software 74 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE SQL Express 2012 Scenarios MANUAL STEPS IF SQL CONNECTION FAILS If the SQL Connection fails because of invalid credentials entered in the SQL dialog box or for
298. rs In the Default Operator drop down list select None Click Save Restart the trinity services S3 mei Create an ultrakey button for menu whose inctercept key value is 41 For more information on creating a ultrakey button refer to the ultrakey user manual Note By default the intercept key 41 is defined in MAXPRO VMS and the replacement macro is To sign on to the joystick controller 176 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE J oystick Controllers 1 Press the Menu button on the joystick controller 2 Select the operator number and then press Enter You are prompted to enter the four digit pin 3 Type the four digit pin and then press Enter Note You can see the names directly on the display To sign off from the joystick controller 1 Press the Menu button on the joystick controller 2 Press the PTZ tilt down button and then press Enter A message asking for confirmation appears 3 Press Enter UPDATING A J OYSTICK CONTROLLER You can update a joystick controller to modify the keyboard settings To update a joystick controller 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Devices in the navigation area and then click Joystick Controllers The Joystick Controllers screen appears in the display area 3 Select the check box corresponding to the joystick controller you want to update and then click Update The Enter Keyboard de
299. rtition to cameras Associating a partition to a camera restricts a non associated user of the partition from viewing the camera or changing the settings of the camera Before you begin Adda Partition See Adding a Partition for more information associate partitions to video inputs 1 Click the Partitions tab The screen displays the associated partitions if any CameraTi x Pa tengan li User Defined Everts saroian E 18 Migratior gent 52 IP Camera Management EQUIP Seres E ET Scheduing Alam Hote ation SMTP Server Setting ved Tangia Figure 4 20 Camera Partitions 2 Click Associate The Select Partitions dialog box appears 3 Select the check box corresponding to the partition name you want to associate 154 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP SITE Video Inputs 4 Click OK The selected partition is displayed in the list of associated partitions To disassociate partitions to camera e Select the check box corresponding to the partition name and then click Remove ASSOCIATING ANALYTICS Before you begin Add Analytics Server See Adding an Analytics Server for more information To associate analytics 1 Click the Analytics tab Channels av alsble for configuration under this package type O of O Aor Notification STP Server Setting Kn Template
300. rver detale Revd Gap Rede Gan Recorder Type NONE 5 Vet of recorders configured under Recneder Group 7 Figure 4 62 Recorder Group General Settings In the Recorder Group box type a name for the recorder group In the Recorder Type drop down list select the recorder that you want to associate Click Save The Associate Recorders and Disassociate Recorders buttons are activated Click Associate Recorders The Select from list to Associate Recorder Group Server dialog box appears ctfrom Listta A ate Recorder Group Server Select from the below list Recorder Name 0 Enterprise 11 Enterprise 12 Associate Cancel Associating Recorder Group Figure 4 63 Select from list Associate MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 259 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE 8 Select the required Recorder Group Server from the list and then click Associate The list of recorders associated in a specific group is displayed under List of Recorders configured under Recorder Group DISASSOCIATING RECORDERS FROM THE RECORDER GROUPS To dissociate recorders from the Recorder Groups 1 In the List of Recorders configured under Recorder Group click Disassociate Recorder The Select from list to dissociate Recorder dialog box appears wa Select from list to disassociate recorders Select from the below list Enterprise 11 O Enterprise 12 Disassociate Cancel Here user c
301. ry report and operator log report can be generated The event history report can be generated for cameras monitors recorders and switchers The event history report lists the events related to a device during a time period For example for a camera you can generate the event history report to know the occurrence of events like enabling of camera motion detection starting of background recording and others The operator log report can be generated to view the activities performed by users The operator log report lists the activities performed by users during a time period For example creating clips adding bookmarks sending messages and other actions performed by a user You can generate reports from the Report tab The following figure illustrates the Report tab Report Tab User Menu Configurator Operator Log Report 03 30 2009 6 03 30 2009 All Operators Date range Operators Workstations Acuvites Workstations Display Area All Activities User Name Activty perc nem 03 30 2009 10 34 51 admin TELODTXPSiocais Status Bar Figure 5 11 Report tab Note For more information on how to generate and view the reports refer to the MAXPRO VMS R310 Help MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 321 VERIFYING THE CONFIGURATION OF MAXPRO VMS EE Checking the Generation of Event History and Operator Log R
302. s operating system MAXPRO VMS Server Software and Microsoft SQL Server software Disk RAID set 2 utilizes 10K RPM SATA 150GB or 10K 15K RPM SCSI 146GB for MAXPRO VMS database files and Microsoft SQL Server database files Note If fault tolerance is required RAID set 1 is RAID 1 10 or 0 1 and RAID set 2 is RAID 10 or 0 1 Multiple Monitor Card Display Adapter Video Resolution Display Adapter with Video resolution 1024x768 pixels 32 bit color or higher Serial Ports Only required if serial device are to be connected Suggested 8 Port MOXA PCI e serial RS232 Network Connection 1Gbit sec or greater MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 21 Hardware Specifications SETTING UP THE CLIENT AND THE SERVER COMPUTERS Table 2 3 MAXPRO VMS Server Performance Spec with Windows 2008 Server R2 64 bit Windows 2012 up to 25 Clients Specification Description Write is required if workstation is used for exporting recordings Processor Dual Intel 6 Core Xeon s E5 2630V2 2 6GHz Recommended Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 and 2012 Operating System 32 amp 64 bit Recommended Server dual power supply suggested Computer Type Server or Workstation Recommended System 16GB Memory RAM DVD Drive RW Read DVD RW Disk Two separate hard drives or two sets of RAID arrays Disk RAID set 1 utilizes 1OK RPM SATA 150GB or 10 15 RPM SCS
303. s screen appears in the display area displaying the list of discovered cameras by the system EQUIP Senes x IP Adress Unqrade firmware for EQUIP Series Cameras Nate Use Yerson option to get firmware verson Device TIE HCDSMEH tial werden Merere BZ C4 NOD CCSund BUHDSMOU omame DIANC Deme B2 DAMOTH ENT MOJIMOTP OO SEC CDM Henuz LI Un ACUDi OsG KHON NE Sten Manos omor BLZ HOGMDUP Manus 3 server Diewow WOOD Hats Cone eso BLD HOSOI Dames mem oron Monet E iens Daroma Dum r itis am Ooms iSc DEEANDDSOtee TE ne Deans t a D Maui eng reser BISHOP Dar 7 Scheddino ooa We AX GM Surd P scheckser roseo BL HOGI Cankc Yd LE BCDSMD A4 Alten Heic D UP Duet cvm SDT Server Setting 2 m Total Record Court 49 mode Timme DP LL osa OOIFSEOES HL 1D two XE Decr OOIFESORSDEC tech n Poet Decr Dec 000413105691 Dee IPSOS LE Dec OOIFSEORSO7S tico per pe 001750006212 m bee Deco gt
304. s to the User for more information 19 Associate Joystick Controllers See Associating joystick controller to users for more information 20 Associate Event Groups See Associating Event Groups to Users for more information 21 Associate Workstations Associating Workstations to the Users for more information 22 Click Save ASSOCIATING PARTITIONS TO THE USER You can associate partitions to a user Associating partitions to a user enables the user to perform video surveillance tasks for all the video devices that are grouped in the partition You can associate more than one partition to a user Before you begin e Adda Partition See Adding a Partition for more information To associate partitions to a user 216 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Users 1 Click the Partitions tab The screen displays the associated partitions if any Assoonted Parties p once aret ive T 3 Figure 4 46 User Partitions 2 Click Associate The Select Partitions dialog box appears 3 Select the check box corresponding to the partition name you want to associate 4 Click OK To disassociate partitions from a user e Select the check box corresponding to the partition name and then click Remove AssociATING WORKSTATIONS TO THE USERS You can associate workstations to users to log on to MAXPRO VMS user interface and perform various actions
305. sabled occurs for the Encoder Name Encoder A Attributes are available only for certain events These events can be associated to a video input multiple times The event attributes are listed in the details of the alarm in Alarm window To view the event attributes of an alarm right click the alarm and then click Show Details Before you begin e Add a Video Input ASSOCIATING EVENTS To associate events to video inputs 1 Click the Events tab The screen displays the associated events if any Recorders S irga dens Figure 4 18 Camera Events MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 149 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE OO v 2 Click Associate The Select from List dialog box appears Select from List x _ Event 1D Event Description MesterDevceName o 622 Camera Blind Detection Enabled MAXPRO NYR 3 o 623 Camera Blind Detection Disabled MAXPRO NYR 3 o 624 Camera Blur Detection Enabled MAXPRO NYR 3 o 625 Camera Blur Detection Disabled MAXPRO NYR 3 0 626 Video CSD Moved MAXPRO NVR 3 0 627 Video CSD Moved Off MAXPRO NVR 3 628 Camera User Recording Started MAXPRO NYR 3 o 629 Camera User Recording Completed MAXPRO NYR 3 o 632 Camera Background Recording Disabled MAXPRO NYR 3 o 633 Camera Background Recording Enabled MAXPRO NYR 3 o 634 Camera Event Recording Started MAXPRO NYR 3 o 635 Camera Event Recording
306. scheduler An alarm is triggered whenever any of the associated event occurs for the scheduler For certain events you can also associate event attributes For example for an Scheduler Job Failed event you can associate attributes such as Scheduler Name Scheduler Description and so on For every attribute that you associate you can set a value based on which the event is triggered In the above example you can associate the attribute Scheduler Name to the event and set its value as Scheduler A When MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 281 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE TO this event is associated to the scheduler an alarm is raised when the event Scheduler Job Failed occurs for the Scheduler Name Scheduler To associate events to a scheduler 1 Click the Events tab The screen displays the associated events if any __ x Evert Cervi Scheduler Job Executed Sehen Xb Fade Schedser Connected Figure 4 76 Scheduler Events 2 Click Associate The Select From List dialog box appears 3 Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to associate 4 Click OK disassociate events from a scheduler Select the check box corresponding to the event and then click Remove The events are disassociated from the scheduler To add Event Groups to events 1 Select the check box corresponding to
307. select a monitor from the keyboard In the Site box select the location in which the monitor is used Select the Lock VideoOutput check box to lock monitor from displaying video In the Slot box type the slot number to identify the slot location of the video output channel In the Video Timeout box type the display time out period The display time out period can be set from 1 999 seconds Enter a value zero if this function is not required MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 8 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Outputs In the Text Line Settings area select the check boxes according to your requirement to select text line settings The following table lists the options Option Description Message Line Defines the line where the Message Line text Example Warning message is displayed Mode Line Defines the line where the Mode text Example Scan mode is displayed Source Description Defines the line the Video Input device description is displayed Channel Description Defines the line where the description for the video device is displayed Real Time Clock Defines the line the Real Time Clock is displayed Note Selecting the Select check box selects all the Text Line Settings 9 In the Text Display Settings area select the check boxes to select the text display settings The following table lists the options Option Descripti
308. ser to lock or unlock video control Unlock VideoSource Lock To allow user to lock or unlock videosource Unlock Set Clock To allow user to set the system time and date SignOff To allow user to sign off from a key board Change Pin To allow user to change the PIN of all system users Status Information To allow user to change the current system status Alarm Enable Disable To allow system user to enable or disable system alarms System Configuration To allow user to run the Windows SetMax configuration editor save the current system environment as the default settings or exit to Windows UserMacro Lock Unlock To allow user to lock or unlock user macros ToolBar Buttons SalvoLayouts To allow user to add or access different salvolayouts Surrounding Camera To allow user to view surrounding cameras Full Screen Mode To allow user to view full screen mode Sync PlayBack Mode To allow user to access the sync playback mode Remote Monitor To allow user to access the remote monitor mode Mode Incident management To allow user to access the incident management mode Mode Create Salvo To allow user to create a salvo Application Launch To allow user to access the application launch pad Pad Salvo Snapshot To allow user to capture a salvo snapshot Instant Clip Export to enable user to instantly export a clip Snapshot To capture a snapshot Co
309. sired macro number The End Macro is executed whenever the video alarm condition is cleared CONTROL SETTINGS 1 Select the Locked check box to prevent the user to control the device 2 From the PTZ Done By drop down list select the required PTZ type The following table lists the PTZ types and steps to configure their settings Type Settings Device This setting is used when the PTZ camera is controlled using the recorder The PTZ settings are done using the local applications of the recorder except for IP Engine To configure PTZ settings for a IP Engine camera see Configuring Camera Control for the Cameras Connected to the IP Engine for more information 146 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs Type Serial Port Settings The followings settings are used when a PTZ camera is controlled by MAXPIT or MATPIT a In the Select Serial Port drop down list select the serial port b In the Source Control ID box a default ID is displayed c In the Source Control Slot box type the slot number within the control subrack where the controller for the current video input device resides Note Valid slot numbers are 1 32 for I O and combination video I O subracks and 1 8 for HD Series subracks Within subracks such as HMX1132 and HMX1600 the control slot is the physical slot where the controller card resides Whereas within HD
310. splay the row elements as shown below e OR In the Show rows with value that perform the following a Select the required option from the Is equal to drop down list b Type the required value corresponding to your selection Select the required option from the AND Or drop down list d Select the required option from the Is equal to drop down list corresponding to your option selected e Type the required value corresponding to your selections f Click Filter The video inputs s columns based on your requirement is displayed For example If you define a row value as Value Start with B4 And that Contains H4D55IP model camera then the result of the filter is displayed as shown below Videoinputs x Adc Update Deiete Vises hou Drag e coke heater and drap hare to grou by Sut coh MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 159 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE TO veces inputs Figure 4 25 Defining Filter To Clear or Reset the filter Click Clear Filter in the dialog box Or Click Reset Filter to reset all the filters SORTING VIDEO INPUT S Sorting feature enables you to sort the required columns ascending or descending It also allows you to group or ungroup based on the specific column To sort the columns ascending or descending 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Devices in the navigation area 3 Click the Video Input s branch The Video Input s screen
311. splayed in the list of associated partitions To disassociate partition from the video outputs e Select the check box corresponding to the partition name and then click Remove ASSOCIATING VIDEO OUTPUTS TO EVENT GROUPS You can associate event groups to video outputs Associating video outputs to event groups allows display of alarms that are associated with the event group Before you begin e Add Event Group To associate event groups to video outputs 1 Click the Event Groups tab The screen displays the associated event groups if any 2 Click Associate The Select Event Groups dialog box appears 3 Select the check box corresponding to the Event Group name you want to associate 4 Click OK To disassociate event groups from video outputs e Select the check box corresponding to the Event Group name and then click Remove ASSOCIATING VIDEO OUTPUTS TO J OYSTICK CONTROLLERS You can associate Joystick Controllers to monitors Monitors associated to a joystick controller can be controlled by a user who is also associated with the joystick controller Before you begin e Update Joystick Controller To associate joystick controllers to video output 1 Click the Joystick Controller tab The screen displays the associated joysticks if any 2 Click Associate The Select Joystick Controller dialog box appears 3 Select the check box corresponding to the joystick name you want to associate 4 Click OK Note By default all
312. sponding to the relay that you want to delete 4 Click Delete A confirmation message appears on top of the display area 5 Click Yes UPDATING THE RELAY You can update a relay device to change its association with a partition and also to modify its settings To update a relay 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Devices in the navigation area and then click relays The Relays screen appears in the display area 3 Select the check box corresponding to the relay you want to update Click Update The settings for the relay appear You can modify the settings 194 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Alarm Inputs ALARM INPUTS Alarm inputs are used to raise alarms through an external device in MAXPRO VMS These alarm inputs can be associated to devices like switcher recorder camera keyboard network and high level device ADDING AN ALARM INPUT You can add an alarm input and associate it to the devices These alarm inputs trigger alarm whenever an event occurs Before you begin e Add Site See Adding a Site for more information e Add Switcher See Adding a Switcher for more information e Add Recorder Adding a Recorder for more information e Add Partition See Adding a Partition for more information Update Joystick Controller See Updating a Joystick Controller for more information By default a site and a partition are available You can ass
313. ssioning and Installation Guide 245 A CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Site SITE Site is a location where video input devices are situated You can define more than one site in MAXPRO VMS A default site is automatically created in MAXPRO VMS and all the video input devices can be associated to it ADDING A SITE You can add a site to associate video inputs recorders switchers video outputs and workstations To add a site 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Groups in the navigation area and then click Sites The Sites screen appears in the display area Total Record Court 1 Figure 4 57 Sites 3 Click Add 4 Anew site gets added to the list You can rename the site name if necessary 5 Click Save DELETING A SITE Before you begin e Disassociate all the associations to the site To delete a site 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Groups in the navigation area and then click Sites The Sites screen appears in the display area Select the check box corresponding to the site you want to delete 4 Click Delete A confirmation message appears on top of the display area Click Yes 246 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Event Group EVENT GROUP An event group is a grouping of events that occur on devices The events that can occur vary based on the type of video devices For example if a video connected t
314. ssioning and Installation Guide 57 INSTALLING THE VMS R310 SOFTWARE E custom insattion 6 Click Yes if you want to add the client workstation name in MAXPRO VMS database Click No if you do not want to add client workstation name in MAXPRO VMS Server Database If you click Yes the Database Server Login dialog box appears YMS R310 Enterprise Edition Database Server Login Select datal er and authentication method ur current thentication authentication using Login ID an Installed Figure 3 26 Database Server Login 7 Click Browse and then select any existing SQL database You can select the existing SQL database on the same network If you do not want to select an existing database proceed to step step 9 8 Select Connect using option as Windows authentication or SQL Server authentication using Login ID and password below Note See SQL Express 2012 Scenarios section for various SQL 2012 Scenarios If you enter an invalid Login ID and Password to connect SQL Server then see Manual Steps if SQL Connection Fails section 58 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Custom Installation 9 Click Next The Language selection for analytics application dialog box appears MAXPRO YMS R310 Enterprise Edition Language selection for analytics application Language English X Install Figure 3 27 Language selection for
315. stem MAXPRO VMS Server Software and Microsoft SQL Server software Disk RAID set 2 utilizes 1OK RPM SATA 150GB or 10K 15K RPM SCSI 146GB for MAXPRO VMS database files and Microsoft SQL Server database files Note If fault tolerance is required RAID set 1 is RAID 1 10 or 0 1 and RAID set 2 is RAID 10 or 0 1 Multiple Monitor Card Display Adapter Video Resolution Display Adapter with Video resolution 1024x768 pixels 32 bit color or higher Serial Ports Only required if serial device are to be connected Suggested 8 Port MOXA PCI e serial RS232 Network Connection IGbit sec or greater MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide SETTING UP THE CLIENT AND THE SERVER COMPUTERS Table 2 2 Hardware Specifications MAXPRO VMS Server Performance Spec with Windows 2008 Server R2 64 bit Windows 2012 up to 10 Clients Specification Description Write is required if workstation is used for exporting recordings Processor Single Intel 6 Core Xeon E5 2630V2 2 6GHz Recommended Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 and 2012 Operating System 324664 bit Recommended Server dual power supply suggested Computer Type Server or Workstation Recommended System 16GB Memory RAM DVD Drive RW Read DVD RW Disk Two separate hard drives or two sets of RAID arrays Disk RAID set 1 utilizes 10K RPM SATA 150GB or 10K 15K RPM SCSI 146GB for Window
316. tails screen appears o REPE Tu Doystick Cortrclers Joystkkl x Can Perform Operations 10 Coefgure Keybonrd F Post Evert Macro Key Ch Joystick Ce fir Promet bestun Tore ones fusi Warning trong fri Evers Flag Fre Fore Flag Pagi ris T Monitor Select Changed paren Scenes Sale 2 Export 13 IP Camera Management 8 senes Figure 4 30 Updating a Joystick Controller 4 Inthe Enter Keyboard Details area select the Enabled check box The Keyboard ID is displayed automatically In the Name box type the name for the keyboard 6 Inthe Default Monitor drop down list select the default monitor to be associated with the joystick controller 7 Inthe Default Operator drop down list select the default user to be associated with the joystick controller MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 177 178 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE J oystick Controllers 8 Inthe LCD Mode drop down list select the LCD display mode 9 Inthe Audible Status area select the check boxes to configure audible keyboard prompts The following table lists the audible status options Option Description Key Click The keyboard beeps
317. tes and MAXPRO VMS components are installed automatically without requiring any manual intervention 48 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Custom Installation 12 After all the prerequisites and MAXPRO VMS R310 components are successfully installed the InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box appears MAXPRO MS R310 Enterprise Edition InstallShield Wizard Complete allShield Wizard has successfully installed MAXPRO YMS R310 Click Finish to exit the InstallShield B E Cancel Figure 3 14 Install Shield Wizard Complete 13 Click Finish Your computer reboots The installation is complete after the reboot operation CUSTOM INSTALLATION Custom installation gives you an option to install the server and the client You can choose to install various device drivers The following table lists the type of installation you can do using the custom installation option Table 2 3 Select features to install Server MAXPRO VMS server and device drivers are installed See Server Installation Client MAXPRO VMS client and MAXPRO VMS Framework are installed See Client Installation Honeywell Video Analytics Video Analytics is installed Video Analytics Server HVA Installation SERVER INSTALLATION Server installation involves installing MAXPRO VMS server device drivers and redundant server 1 Perform steps 1 through 13 in the secti
318. tes improper function of the disk to record video MONITORING THE STATUS OF THE CAMERA SERVER You can view the status of each camera server The status is indicated as OK or Software Fault To view the status of the camera server 1 2 3 4 Click the Configurator tab Expand Devices in the navigation area and then click Recorders The Recorders screen appears in the display area Double click the IP Engine or select the IP Engine and then click Update The general settings for the IP Engine appear Click the Advance Settings tab The advance settings for the IP Engine appear Click the Server Status tab The list of camera servers and their status is displayed VIEWING THE VERSION AND LICENSE INFORMATION FOR IP ENGINE To view license information of IP Engine 1 2 94 Click the Configurator tab Expand Devices in the navigation area and then click Recorders The Recorders screen appears in the display area Double click the recorder or select the recorder and then click Update The general settings for the recorder appear Click the Advanced Settings tab Click the About tab The version and license information is displayed The following table provides the information details Version Information Version The version of recorder Host Information MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP SITE Recorders
319. tes the Image Clip window ee Figure 5 7 Image Clip window The images can also be saved in other folders on the computer Note For more information on how to save and view images refer to the MAXPRO VMS R310 Help 314 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide VERIFYING THE CONFIGURATION MAXPRO VMS Checking the Creation of Clips CHECKING THE CREATION OF CLIPS Clips can be created from recorded video and saved in MP4 MPG AVI and WMV format depending on the format supported by the recorders Only the clips saved in the ImagesAndClips folder at the location in the hard drive in which MAXPRO VMS files are installed can be viewed in the Image Clip window For example X ProgramFiles Honeywell Trinity Framework ImagesAndClips Here X is the hard drive The clips can also be saved in other folders on the computer The clips can be saved with digital signatures Digital signatures ensure authenticity of clips Digital signatures are primarily used to authenticate videos that are produced in courts as evidence A digital signature generates a unique string for the clip using algorithms recommended by the World Wide Web Consortium W3C standards If the video in the clip is modified a verification check for the unique string fails indicating that the content is tampered When a clip is saved with the digital signature a package file with the PKG extension is created to save the clip
320. the Workstations tab The screen displays the associated workstations if any MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Roles TR moe TR Roe 4 x Aysccnted Worbstatn Asioxinted wor Decrpten Figure 4 53 Roles Workstations 5 Click Associate The Select User Workstation dialog box appears 6 Select the check box corresponding to the workstation name you want to associate 7 Click OK disassociate workstations from the role e Select the check box corresponding to the workstation name and then click Remove UPDATING A ROLE You can update the details of a role by changing the role name In addition you can also add or remove privileges to the role To update a role 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand the User Management branch in the navigation area and then click Roles The Roles screen appears in the display area Select the check box corresponding to the role you want to update Click Update The general settings appear You can modify the settings DELETING A ROLE You can delete a role from MAXPRO VMS Before you delete a role ensure that you remove all the associations made to it Before you begin e Disassociate Partitions See Associating Partitions to the Roles for more information e Disassociate Workstations See Associating Workstations to the Roles for more information To delete a role 1 Click th
321. the list The schedule s details appear 10 Click Delete and then click Yes in response to the confirmation prompt To delete a recurring schedule 1 Select the start day for the schedule in Schedules on The schedules for that day appear in the list 2 Select the schedule you want to delete from the list The details of the schedule appear 3 Click Delete only if you want to delete the schedule occurrence on that day If you want to delete all occurrences of the schedule click Delete all occurrences This button appears only when you select a recurring schedule ASSOCIATING A SWITCHER TO A VIDEO INPUT Switchers are devices that route multiple video inputs to multiple video outputs You can associate video input devices like analog cameras smart device VCRs and so on to a switcher You can also configure switcher parameters like switcher input number macros and slot number CONFIGURING THE SWITCHER SETTINGS 1 Inthe Connected to section click Switcher The Switcher drop down list is enabled 2 Select the required switcher The Switcher Settings appear 3 Inthe Input Number box type the video input number on the subrack 4 In the Device Macro Flags section select the required fields to set the macro flag to True This field allows for definition of the default cold boot state of the macro flags for the current video input device Click Select All to set all the macro flags to True 5 Under Pretext Settings in the Pr
322. the partition are displayed The icons next to the devices in the Devices window indicate the status and type of each device MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide VERIFYING THE CONFIGURATION MAXPRO VMS Checking the Device Listing in the Devices Window Note Refer to the MAXPRO VMS R310 Help for more information on the Viewer tab MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 305 306 VERIFYING THE CONFIGURATION OF MAXPRO VMS Checking the Live Video from Cameras CHECKING THE LIVE VIDEO FROM CAMERAS Ce es To ensure that all the cameras are connected and functioning properly you need to check for live video from them To select the cameras and view live video Double click the camera in the Devices window or My Devices window You can also drag the camera on a panel in the salvo layout The panel starts displaying live video and the label Live appears over the video display The camera can also be selected using the virtual keyboard and joystick controller You can select multiple cameras and view live video in different panels of the salvo layout Note Refer to the MAXPRO VMS R310 Help for more information on how to view live video from cameras MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide VERIFYING THE CONFIGURATION OF MAXPRO VMS Checking the Playback of Recorded Video CHECKING THE PLAYBACK OF RECORDED VIDEO To playback video the recording from the camera must be
323. the role is associated MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 223 224 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Roles In the Privileges section select the check box corresponding to the privileges for enabling them for the role The following table lists the privileges you can enable for a user Privileges Viewer Description Viewer Access To restrict access to viewer tab Site View To view sites Alarm To view alarms ImageClipTreeView To view image clip tree Message Box To view message box MyDevices To view MyDevices Shared Devices To view and restrict shared devices Permission KeyboardUtility To access virtual keyboard Store Pre shots To store pre shots Reloading Device Connections To reload the device connections View Update License To view or update license Tris Access To access iris of the camera Focus Access To access focus access of the camera Video Outputs To view Video Outputs Monitors To view access monitors Sequences To view sequences Salvo Views To view salvo Add My Salvo View To add my salvo view Modify My Salvo To modify my salvo view View Delete My Salvo View delete my salvo view Add Shared Salvo To add shared salvo view View Modify Shared Salvo To modify shared salvo view View Delete Shared Salvo Delete Shared Salvo View View
324. to MAXPRO VMS interface and perform various actions See Associating Workstations to the Roles for more information ADDING A WORKSTATION A user can log on to MAXPRO VMS user interface through client workstation Workstation name is the computer name of the client computer To add a workstation 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Groups in the navigation area and then click Workstations The Workstations screen appears in the display area Workstations x User Can Perform Add Save and Delete Operations To Configure Workstation Workstancn Nare O winscosm cen Total Record Court 1 Add Delete s 5 2 Figure 4 56 Workstations 3 Click Add A new workstation gets added to the list 4 Rename the workstation name if necessary 5 Click Save DELETING A WORKSTATION You can delete a workstation When you delete a workstation all the associations made to the workstation are also removed 244 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP SITE Workstations To delete a workstation 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Groups in the navigation area and then click Workstations The Workstations screen appears in the display area Select the check box corresponding to the workstation you want to remove 4 Click Delete A confirmation message appears on top of the display area Click Yes MAXPRO VMS R310 Commi
325. triggered when threshold becomes 51 4 Onthe Event Groups tab select the check box corresponding to the event group that you want to associate to the alarm input and then click Associate 5 Click Save CONNECTING ALARM INPUT TO THE HiGH LEVEL DEVICE To connect alarm input to a high level device 1 Inthe High Level Device box type the device number 200 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP SITE Alarm Inputs On the Advanced Settings tab specify the following details Settings SubrackID Description The Subrack ID number where the alarm input resides is displayed automatically Note The valid range is 1 99 If a high level or mimic panel output is used the number is prefixed with an If a keyboard output is used the number is prefixed with a For VideoBlox subrack this represents the V communication port number to which the VideoBlox alarm concentrator AVBPIT is connected Valid range V maximum communication ports Subrack Slot Type a slot number within the control subrack where the alarm input resides On the Event Settings tab specify the following details Settings Description Event Type a description for the event Description Start Macro Type an alarm start macro When an alarm condition is detected for an alarm input the alarm start macro is executed Finish Macro
326. ts must meet for each region of interest MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 139 140 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs To define a condition 1 Inthe Region Name box type the name of the region 2 Click New A condition row is added to list 3 Define the condition by selecting appropriate values for the three condition properties Object type Behavior and Direction The following table lists the settings to define the condition Note As you select a value for each property the condition in the list is updated Settings Description Object type The type of object you want the algorithm to detect Valid types are e person e vehicle e other Object e Object When any Object is selected it detects any moving object greater than the minimum object size Note You cannot select Object type when using the object tracking algorithm It is available only when using the object tracking and classification algorithm Behavior The object s behavior that triggers the event Valid behaviors are e Enter enters the region e Exit exits the region behavior matches any behavior Start and stop are only applicable if the Processing type property is set to Full Frame Direction The direction in which the object must move to trigger the event the exact wording depends on whether you set behavior to enter or exit e to from the Right e to
327. u can perform cold boot or warm boot of the MAXPRO VMS Controller 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand the Servers branch in the navigation area and then click Controller The Controller screen appears in the display area Click Update The Trinity Controller screen appears 4 Click Cold Boot to restart the MAXPRO VMS Controller Or Click Warm Boot to reinitialize all the devices connected to the MAXPRO VMS without any restart or shutdown of MAXPRO VMS Server MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 267 268 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Serial Port SERIAL PORT Serial port is a communication interface with which information is transferred in or out one bit at a time Serial ports are added to MAXPRO VMS server for communication with joystick controllers Ultrakey keyboards Switchers and Protocol Interface Translators PIT You can add up to 20 serial ports in MAXPRO VMS server ADDING A SERIAL PORT To add a serial port 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand the Servers branch in the navigation area and then click Serial Ports The Serial Ports screen appears in the display area 3 Click Add A Joystick screen appears Ports amp Erker Serisi port This port belongs to Server WIN NT XMDUOPAM a sch COM Port Settings fed ter 192 fes 1 Stay Hive zl fon Tyee Dono errs
328. ubrack controller card HMX128 located in slot 0 For VideoBlox subrack the control slot number should be greater than zero Valid range 1 to 4 d In the Offset box type the ID number of the PTZ site receiver connected to that camera Note The valid range for site IDs is 1 16 A O indicates that a hardwired relay output module is being used in the subrack slot for controlling that camera Offset is the hardware address configured in the PTZ camera MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 147 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE TE vere mts 3 Inthe PTZ Viewer Sensitivity drop down list select the required sensitiveness 4 Inthe Available Control Options area select the options to enable or disable the control functions The available control functions vary between the different types of video input device as shown in the following figures The following tables lists the available control functions for different types of video input devices Camera VCR or Standard Device LoggingVCR or or Smart Device Standby VCR Wash Wipe Record Output Manual Iris Play Outpu2 Pan Rewind Output3 Tilt Fast Forward Output4 Focus Slow Output5 Zoom Pause Output6 Present View Eject Output7 Ext Walk Flashback Stop Output8 The following table lists the special considerations for configuring some of the cameras for IP Engine Streamer Type Fields GrandEye and
329. upported by streamer CameraServerCha OldCamServer Machine name nged of the Camera Server NewCam Server Machine name of the Camera Server MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 151 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Ov The following tables describes the event name event attributes and their description related 152 to cameras with analytics Events Video lost in analytics server Event Attributes Server name Attribute Description Server name Video restored in analytics server Server name Server name Camera Blind Detected Camera blind Camera blind in percentage Camera Blur Detected Camera blur Camera blur in percentage Scene changed Scene changed Scene changed in percentage Car counted in lane Object count Car count Car entered restricted zone Zone information Zone information Car exited restricted zone Zone information Zone information Car parked in handicapped zone Zone information Zone information Entered target zone Object type Object type Zone information Zone information Object entered restricted zone Object type Object type Zone information Zone information Person counted as entering Object count Object count Zone information Zone information Object type Object type Person counted as exitin
330. usd cem Am I 25 shed Video Irons Settings Gow pt fane Cameroon Carera E 2 artense canera ve 7 G Groups a Sequences Cp hunter Workstations 5 Corrected To Mamar 18 Evert raps Keys Recorder ho loges Systems Noros fez zj a irum elverk tet Source AE Seul Pets Association be User Defined Everts Paeurmerph RPL Number Figure 4 17 Camera Screen 4 From the Device Type drop down list select the required video input type The currently supported video input device types are listed in the following table Video Input Device Description Camera For details on configuring a camera see Adding a Camera 118 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs Video Input Device Description Standard Device For details on configuring the devices see Adding a Video Input Device on page 162 Smart Device Trunk VCR Standby VCR Logging VCR Menu Black Source Digital Input Trunk For details on configuring a digital input trunk see Adding a Video Input Device Digital Input Trunk Associate Partition See Associating Partitions to Video Inputs for more information 6 Associate Events and Event Attrib
331. ut 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Devices in the navigation area and then click Alarm Inputs The Alarm Input screen appears in the display area Select the check box corresponding to the alarm input you want to update 4 Click Update The settings for the alarm input appear You can modify the settings MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 203 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE CONTACT GROUP Contact group is a group of users in MAXPRO VMS You can create contact groups of users with different roles For example you can create a contact group of users who are associated to operator role Alarm notifications can be sent to a contact group ADDING A CONTACT GROUP You can add a user group to group the users on the basis of the roles Only the admin user can add a contact group in MAXPRO VMS Before you begin Add Roles See Adding a role for more information e Add Users See Adding a User for more information e Add Workstations Adding a Workstation for more information Add Partition See Adding a Partition for more information To add a contact group 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand User Management in the navigation area and then click Contact Group The Contact Group screen appears in the display area Contact Group x Contact Group aope Total Record Court 0 Add Delete m 11803 6 1302 Fi
332. utes See Associating Events and Event Attributes to a Video Input for more information 7 Associate Analytics See Associating Analytics for more information Note You can associate analytics only for cameras 8 Click Save ADDING A CAMERA Adding a camera involves defining the camera s set up and operation across switchers and recorders You can update or configure the general settings of a camera to configure PTZ settings and connect a camera to a recorder or switcher To configure a camera 1 Inthe Camera Type area click PTZ Camera if the configured camera is PTZ or click Fixed Camera if the camera type is fixed 2 Inthe Video Input Details area specify the following camera details Field Description Video Input Type a camera name The camera name appears in the devices Name window making it easy to select Description Type a description for the camera CallupNumber unique number that identifies the camera By default the next available number is allocated The operators can use the number to quickly view the live video from the camera using the virtual keyboard Site Location of the camera MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 119 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE 3 Inthe Alternative Camera Settings area specify the following details Settings Description Alternate Type the number of the camera that has to be selected alternate Camera
333. v d Carter Seius Cage Praed Bd 65 Rew C 14 Defa Disabled ot Mw Sud brn 2 Fined Cymera Oude 65 Rew 2 D Camera Abos Defined Events KOAH Buld 5 Rev x Odak Omabed Canes E a Migration mous 1 was Cigtal PTZ Camera Bde Rew C D Camera Jet om Du 25 PANASONIC OROO23916 1065 PTZ Camera Bat Hey Desik e Cheer E 1 Camera Monagrsnent ow w Sardina Dial Fani Camara Rid 65 Rev C n D Ded tied ror sse hedding eu Digtal Feed Comers Bull 66 nev C Figure 4 26 Video Input s Screen 160 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP SITE Video Inputs 4 Right click on the required column name Sorting options are displayed as shown below ge ideals xi Ada Update ide rus 5 ciam rd er A hern to roug by Pal cham Seat Lacer by VdecfepNames Sort Descending by Videcinguttame ws a Clear Sertieq by Videnirguetame 5 amend Group by Wdectnputume 4 Deni D Camera down Lrgap Videatingattiere cines owd Chowne Carrera Carrara dowd Camera ase wan w 22 Fuad Camara MAXPRO NVR 1d Duabied Camera Duae Dabit Fed Camara VAXPRO NA 12 Camera tonne Digi nnd Covers MA
334. ve Note You can switch on or switch off an alarm input using the On and Off buttons under Trigger Alarm Input CONNECTING ALARM INPUT TO THE NETWORK To connect alarm input to a network 1 In the Network box type the network node and the video input device number for which you want to associate the alarm input 2 On the Event Settings tab specify the following details Settings Description Event Description Type a description for the event Start Macro Type an alarm start macro When an alarm condition is detected for an alarm input the alarm start macro is executed Finish Macro Type an alarm finish macro When a detected alarm input returns to its normal state the alarm finish macro is executed Global ID Type a unique global ID If the Global Event ID is not assigned MAXPRO VMS assigns a unique global ID automatically when you save the event settings Severity Type a severity level Note Severity level is set to trigger alarms when the threshold is met For example if the threshold is set 50 in the preferences tab an alarm is triggered when threshold becomes 51 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 197 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE 3 Event Groups tab select the check box corresponding to the event group that you want to associate to the alarm input and then click Associate 4 Click Save CONNECTING ALARM INPUT TO THE RECORDER To
335. ved in motion and speed of the object involved in motion 1 Click Start tuning and then configure the settings for Standard Low CPU or Premium High CPU as per the algorithm you selected Standard Low CPU algorithm 132 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs The following table list the Standard low CPU algorithm tuning properties Settings Detection frame rate Description The frame rate you want the motion detection algorithm to detect a motion An object is considered to be moving if it moves inside a region of interest for at least two consecutive frames The chance of motion being detected depends on e frame rate a higher frame rate increases the chance of motion being detected size of the region of interest the larger the region of interest the longer the object takes to move through it increasing the chance of motion being detected e speed of the object the faster the object moves the shorter is the amount of time required to pass through the region of interest thereby decreasing the chance of motion being detected The default frame rate is 3 frames per second A higher frame rate increases the chance of a fast moving object being detected The bandwidth at which the frames delivered is displayed If you are using HNVE130A MPEG streams VMD uses I frames for video motion detection and the
336. video inputs like cameras Video analytics monitors the video from cameras at real time and triggers alarms to whenever an event occurs ADDING VIDEO INPUTS Before you begin e Add Site See Adding a Site e Add Partition See Adding a Partition e Add Event Groups See Adding an Event Group e Add Recorders See Adding a Recorder e Add Switchers See Adding a Switcher By default a site partition and event groups are available You can associate the camera to them or create new You can add a camera to view live video and record video You can associate cameras to partitions and events To add a video input 1 Click the Configurator tab MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 117 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE TE vere mts 2 Expand Devices in the navigation area and then click Video Inputs The Video Inputs screen appears in the display area and displays the list of video inputs sa Redes _ e vdeolnouts Lure Dit Vater Drac chow hear art har to gg ty that cm pren T Slate Bs Dhi mian and C 9 User Monagernent Content Digtai ned Camera Sule 65 Rev C feriat Digtal aed Comara Dud 65 Rev C Camara Roles Dial Fand 65 Rev C 4 Odak Carmen z Cipta Camera Bald 65 Rev C Ddwk Ded Comer Dus RTSP Stren
337. video output you want to update 4 Click Update The settings for the video output appear You can modify the settings Click Save LOCKING THE DISPLAY ON THE MONITOR The analog monitor can be locked to display the video only from a particular camera and field of view The operator cannot perform pan tilt or zoom using a monitor with locked display To lock the display on a monitor 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Devices in the navigation area and then click Video Outputs The Video Outputs screen appears in the display area Select the check box corresponding to the monitor you want to lock Double click or click Update The General Settings for the monitor appears Select the Lock VideoOuput check box Click Save ASSOCIATING PARTITIONS TO VIDEO OUTPUTS You can add partitions to video outputs A video output associated with a partition can be viewed and managed by a user who is in turn associated with the partition MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 173 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Before you begin e Add a Partition See Adding a Partition for more information To associate partitions to video outputs 1 Click the Partitions tab The screen displays the associated partitions if any 2 Click Associate The Select Partitions dialog box appears 3 Select the check box corresponding to the partition name you want to associate 4 Click OK The selected partition is di
338. wn in the specified Station s when an object satisfies the condition If a Station has an alarm monitor the video is displayed on the alarm monitor Station number The number of the Station that the video is sent to if you select the Send video to Station s check box All stations in area The area containing the Stations that the video is sent if you select the Send video to Station s check box Do not raise repetitive eventsfor The length of time after the object has the same object for moved outside the region of interest new alarms recordings and video streams to Station are reserved This property affects the other properties in this table as follows e A new alarm is not generated until this time has expired e new recording does not start until this time has expired In addition if you set the Record for property to While object in the region recording continues until this time has expired Video is not re sent to a Station until this time has expired SCHEDULES A schedule defines the date and times when recording and video analytics motion detection and object tracking and classification functions are enabled for a camera A recurring schedule is a schedule that occurs at regular intervals CREATING A SCHEDULE You can create schedules for the camera to record video at recurring intervals and to enable camera to record motion detection and object tracking at a stipulated time
339. work 3 5 includes NET 20 and 3 0 APIs with new technologies for HTTP Activation i building applications that offer Confirmation Non HTTP Activation appealing user interfaces protect your customers personal identity v NET Framework 4 5 Features Installed information enable seamless and C Background Intelligent Transfer Service BITS i secure communication and provide ability to model a range of business processes BitLocker Drive Encryption C BitLocker Network Unlock C BranchCache C Client for NFS C Data Center Bridging Enhanced Storage O Failover Clustering C Group Policy Management Figure 1 10 Select Features Select the following feature check boxes in the Features pane e Net Framework 3 5 features Net Framework 3 5 includes Net 2 0 and 3 0 Activation e Non HTTP Activation Click Next The Confirm installation selection screen appears DESTINATION SERVER Confirm installation selections WIN KHMQOSE22HS Before You Begin To install the following roles role services or features on selected server click Install Installation Type Server Selection Optional features such as administration tools might be displayed on this page because they have been selected automatically If you do not want to install these optional features click Previous to clear Server Roles car Features Framewo
340. x corresponding to the partition name and then click Remove 284 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE J obs Jobs are tasks that automatically executed at a stipulated time and date Jobs can be scheduled to clean up database and back up the database The frequency to perform the tasks can be defined Only a user with admin rights can create jobs in MAXPRO VMS ADDING J OBS You can add a job to clean up the database or backup the data To add a job 1 Click the Configurator tab 2 Expand Scheduling in the navigation area and then click Job The Job screen appears in the display area 3 Click Add The Schedule Job screen appears Backup Li 7 T 79 Det ok E Job Sette te exhppuhasever W exo noth should nt cortan space in directory nome Baup G Difereriial Badu Figure 4 78 Schedule Job 4 Inthe Job Name box type the name for the job 5 From the Operation drop down list select Database Cleanup or Database Backup 6 From the Scheduler drop down list select the required scheduler 285 8 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING SITE J obs 7 the Job Settings tab specify the settings
341. xsubrack this number represents the physical input location of the video output channel Valid range 1 to 255 for VideoBlox 10 In the Network Settings area e Select the Net Device option and then type the exact location and reference for the video e Select the LINK check box if you want to broadcast the status changes and actions performed on the current video output device on the network In the Video Timeout box type the display time out period The display time out period can be set from 1 999 seconds Enter a value zero if this function is not required In the Text Line Settings area select the check boxes according to your requirement to select text line settings The following table lists the options Option Description Message Line Defines the line where the Message Line text Example Warning message is displayed Mode Line Defines the line where the Mode text Example Scan mode is displayed Source Description Defines the line the Video Input device description is displayed Channel Description Defines the line where the description for the video device is displayed MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 169 170 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP SITE Video Outputs Option Description Real Time Clock Defines the line the Real Time Clock is displayed Note Selecting the Select All check box selects all the Text Line Settings
342. y applies to Recording schedules The time the recording is stored before it is automatically deleted Recurrence Details Recurring Select No if you want only one recording Otherwise select how often you want the recording to take place e Daily e Weekly e Monthly End after Only applicable if you select recurring If you want to create a recurring schedule that never expires you must consider using background recording The number of days before the schedule expires Click OK The schedule is created 143 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE TE Note Clicking Cancel terminates the configured schedule DELETING A SCHEDULE You can delete a schedule for the camera when you do not want to record video at recurring intervals and disable camera from recording motion detection and object tracking at a stipulated time To delete a schedule 1 Click the Configurator tab Expand Devices in the navigation area Click the Cameras branch The Cameras screen appears in the display area Uv meom Double click the camera or select the camera and then click Update The general settings for the camera appear Click the Advance Settings tab 7 Click the Schedules tab 8 Selectthe start day for the schedule in Schedules on The schedules for that day appear in the list Ensure that you are deleting the right schedule 9 Select the schedule you want to delete from
343. y area 3 Select the check box corresponding to the switcher you want to delete 4 Click Delete A confirmation message appears on top of the display area 5 Click Yes 184 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Switchers ASSOCIATING PARTITIONS TO SWITCHER You can associate partitions to switcher Associating a partition to a switcher restricts a non associated user of the partition from viewing the switcher or changing the settings of the switcher Before you begin e Add a Partition See Adding a Partition for more information To associate partitions to a switcher 1 Click the Partitions tab The screen displays the associated partitions if any RMA Figure 4 33 Switcher Partitions 2 Click Associate The Select Partitions dialog box appears 3 Select the check box corresponding to the partition name you want to associate 4 Click OK To disassociate partitions from switcher e Select the check box corresponding to the partition name and then click Remove ASSOCIATING EVENTS TO SWITCHER You can associate events to switcher An alarm is triggered whenever an event occurs To associate events to a switcher 1 Click the Events tab The screen displays the associated events if any MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 185 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Norme key atria

maxpro® vms r300 sp1 - Honeywell Integrated Security

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

maxpro&reg; vms r300 sp1 - Honeywell Integrated Security

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

maxpro® vms r300 sp1 - Honeywell Integrated Security